Commit Graph

3817 Commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
Bruce Momjian a659e789b7 docs: list single-letter options first in command-line summary
In a few places, the long-version options were listed before the
single-letter ones in the command summary of a few commands.  This
didn't match other commands, and didn't match the option ordering later
in the same reference page.

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-12-03 10:28:58 -05:00
Michael Paquier b5913f6120 Refactor CLUSTER and REINDEX grammar to use DefElem for option lists
This changes CLUSTER and REINDEX so as a parenthesized grammar becomes
possible for options, while unifying the grammar parsing rules for
option lists with the existing ones.

This is a follow-up of the work done in 873ea9e for VACUUM, ANALYZE and
EXPLAIN.  This benefits REINDEX for a potential backend-side filtering
for collatable-sensitive indexes and TABLESPACE, while CLUSTER would
benefit from the latter.

Author: Alexey Kondratov, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8a8f5f73-00d3-55f8-7583-1375ca8f6a91@postgrespro.ru
2020-12-03 10:13:21 +09:00
Michael Paquier 8a17f44c1e doc: Remove more notes about compatibilities with past versions
This is a follow-up of the work done in fa42c2e, that did not include
all the fixes previously agreed on.  The contents removed here can be
confusing to the reader as they refer to rather old server versions.

Author: Stephen Frost, Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas, Yaroslav Schekin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB8KJ=jYHgnxLLZSNJz7gBTck4TxomngCmGkw3nEMSNF0yL6wA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1599765595731-0.post@n3.nabble.com
2020-12-01 16:32:26 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 58ebe967f8
Document concurrent indexes waiting on each other
Because regular CREATE INDEX commands are independent, and there's no
logical data dependency, it's not immediately obvious that transactions
held by concurrent index builds on one table will block the second phase
of concurrent index creation on an unrelated table, so document this
caveat.

Backpatch this all the way back.  In branch master, mention that only
some indexes are involved.

Author: James Coleman <jtc331@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAaqYe994=PUrn8CJZ4UEo_S-FfRr_3ogERyhtdgHAb2WG_Ufg@mail.gmail.com
2020-11-30 18:24:55 -03:00
Fujii Masao 4a36eab79a doc: Add description about re-analysis and re-planning of a prepared statement.
A prepared statement is re-analyzed and re-planned whenever database
objects used in the statement have undergone definitional changes or
the planner statistics of them have been updated. The former has been
documented from before, but the latter was not previously. This commit
adds the description about the latter case into the docs.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Andy Fan, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3ac82f4817c9fe274a905c8a38d87bd9@oss.nttdata.com
2020-11-26 16:17:10 +09:00
Michael Paquier 878f3a19c6 Remove INSERT privilege check at table creation of CTAS and matview
As per discussion with Peter Eisentraunt, the SQL standard specifies
that any tuple insertion done as part of CREATE TABLE AS happens without
any extra ACL check, so it makes little sense to keep a check for INSERT
privileges when using WITH DATA.  Materialized views are not part of the
standard, but similarly, this check can be confusing as this refers to
an access check on a table created within the same command as the one
that would insert data into this table.

This commit removes the INSERT privilege check for WITH DATA, the
default, that 846005e removed partially, but only for WITH NO DATA.

Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d049c272-9a47-d783-46b0-46665b011598@enterprisedb.com
2020-11-21 19:45:30 +09:00
Bruce Momjian 481f9dc3dc doc: improve wording of the need for analyze of exp. indexes
This is a followup commit on 3370207986.

Reported-by: Justin Pryzby

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201112211143.GL30691@telsasoft.com

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-11-16 10:26:17 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera bcbd771332
Fix typo
Introduced in 90fdc259866e; backpatch to 12.

Author: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e92b3fba98a0c0f7afc0a2a37e765954@xs4all.nl
2020-11-16 10:54:11 -03:00
Michael Paquier 846005e4f3 Relax INSERT privilege requirement for CTAS and matviews WITH NO DATA
When specified, WITH NO DATA does not insert any data into the relation
created, so skip checking for the insert permissions.  With WITH DATA or
WITH NO DATA, it is always required for the user to have CREATE
privileges on the schema targeted for the relation.

Note that plain CREATE TABLE AS or CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW queries have
begun to work accidentally without INSERT privilege checks as of
874fe3ae, while using EXECUTE or EXPLAIN ANALYZE would fail with the ACL
check, so this makes the behavior for all the command flavors consistent
with each other.  This is arguably a bug fix, but there have been no
complaints about the current behavior either so stable branches are not
changed.

While on it, document properly the privileges requirements for each
commands with more tests for all the scenarios possible, and avoid a
useless bulk-insert allocation when using WITH NO DATA.

Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACWc3N8j0_9nMPz9wcAUnVcdKHzFdDZJ3hVFNEbqtcyG9w@mail.gmail.com
2020-11-16 11:52:40 +09:00
Tom Lane 92bf7e2d02 Provide the OR REPLACE option for CREATE TRIGGER.
This is mostly straightforward.  However, we disallow replacing
constraint triggers or changing the is-constraint property; perhaps
that can be added later, but the complexity versus benefit tradeoff
doesn't look very good.

Also, no special thought is taken here for whether replacing an
existing trigger should result in changes to queued-but-not-fired
trigger actions.  We just document that if you're surprised by the
results, too bad, don't do that.  (Note that any such pending trigger
activity would have to be within the current session.)

Takamichi Osumi, reviewed at various times by Surafel Temesgen,
Peter Smith, and myself

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0DDF369B45A1B44B8A687ED43F06557C010BC362@G01JPEXMBYT03
2020-11-14 17:05:34 -05:00
Bruce Momjian 3370207986 docs: mention that expression indexes need analyze
Expression indexes can't benefit from pre-computed statistics on
columns.

Reported-by: Nikolay Samokhvalov

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANNMO++5rw9RDA=p40iMVbMNPaW6O=S0AFzTU=KpYHRpCd1voA@mail.gmail.com

Author: Nikolay Samokhvalov, modified

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-11-12 15:00:44 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas 9c4f5192f6 Allow pg_rewind to use a standby server as the source system.
Using a hot standby server as the source has not been possible, because
pg_rewind creates a temporary table in the source system, to hold the
list of file ranges that need to be fetched. Refactor it to queue up the
file fetch requests in pg_rewind's memory, so that the temporary table
is no longer needed.

Also update the logic to compute 'minRecoveryPoint' correctly, when the
source is a standby server.

Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Soumyadeep Chakraborty
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/0c5b3783-af52-3ee5-f8fa-6e794061f70d%40iki.fi
2020-11-12 14:52:24 +02:00
Bruce Momjian b8b6a0124b doc: fix spelling "connction" to "connection"
Was wrong in commit 1a9388bd0f.

Reported-by: Tom Lane, Justin Pryzby

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201102063333.GE22691@telsasoft.com

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-11-10 19:18:35 -05:00
Magnus Hagander d2e4bf688e Remove -o option to postmaster
This option was declared obsolete many years ago.

Reviewed-By: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEyOE=9CQwZm2j=vwP5+6OLCSoxn9pBjK8gyRdkTzMfqtQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-11-10 13:15:01 +01:00
Tom Lane eeda7f6338 Revert "Accept relations of any kind in LOCK TABLE".
Revert 59ab4ac32, as well as the followup fix 33862cb9c, in all
branches.  We need to think a bit harder about what the behavior
of LOCK TABLE on views should be, and there's no time for that
before next week's releases.  We'll take another crack at this
later.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16703-e348f58aab3cf6cc@postgresql.org
2020-11-06 16:17:56 -05:00
Tom Lane d907bd0543 Allow users with BYPASSRLS to alter their own passwords.
The intention in commit 491c029db was to require superuserness to
change the BYPASSRLS property, but the actual effect of the coding
in AlterRole() was to require superuserness to change anything at all
about a BYPASSRLS role.  Other properties of a BYPASSRLS role should
be changeable under the same rules as for a normal role, though.

Fix that, and also take care of some documentation omissions related
to BYPASSRLS and REPLICATION role properties.

Tom Lane and Stephen Frost, per bug report from Wolfgang Walther.
Back-patch to all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a5548a9f-89ee-3167-129d-162b5985fcf8@technowledgy.de
2020-11-03 15:41:32 -05:00
Magnus Hagander 5b3dca096f Clarify temporary table name shadowing in CREATE TABLE docs
Author: David Johnston
2020-11-02 15:00:24 +01:00
Thomas Munro 257836a755 Track collation versions for indexes.
Record the current version of dependent collations in pg_depend when
creating or rebuilding an index.  When accessing the index later, warn
that the index may be corrupted if the current version doesn't match.

Thanks to Douglas Doole, Peter Eisentraut, Christoph Berg, Laurenz Albe,
Michael Paquier, Robert Haas, Tom Lane and others for very helpful
discussion.

Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier versions)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0uEQCpfq_%2BLYFBdArCe4Ot98t1aR4eYiYTe%3DyavQygiQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-11-03 01:19:50 +13:00
Thomas Munro 7d1297df08 Remove pg_collation.collversion.
This model couldn't be extended to cover the default collation, and
didn't have any information about the affected database objects when the
version changed.  Remove, in preparation for a follow-up commit that
will add a new mechanism.

Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0uEQCpfq_%2BLYFBdArCe4Ot98t1aR4eYiYTe%3DyavQygiQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-11-03 00:44:59 +13:00
Michael Paquier 8a15e735be Fix some grammar and typos in comments and docs
The documentation fixes are backpatched down to where they apply.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201031020801.GD3080@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 9.6
2020-11-02 15:14:41 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 59ab4ac324
Accept relations of any kind in LOCK TABLE
The restriction that only tables and views can be locked by LOCK TABLE
is quite arbitrary, since the underlying mechanism can lock any relation
type.  Drop the restriction so that programs such as pg_dump can lock
all relations they're interested in, preventing schema changes that
could cause a dump to fail after expending much effort.

Backpatch to 9.5.

Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reported-by: Wells Oliver <wells.oliver@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201021200659.GA32358@alvherre.pgsql
2020-10-27 13:49:19 -03:00
Heikki Linnakangas fa42c2ecb0 docs: Remove notes about incompatibilies with very old versions.
These are old enough that they'll cause more confusion and distraction
to new readers, than they could help anyone upgrade from very old
servers.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/fd93f1c5-7818-a02c-01e5-1075ac0d4def%40iki.fi
2020-10-26 09:07:14 +02:00
Tom Lane 1b62d0fb3e Allow psql to re-use connection parameters after a connection loss.
Instead of immediately PQfinish'ing a dead connection, save it aside
so that we can still extract its parameters for \connect attempts.
(This works because PQconninfo doesn't care whether the PGconn is in
CONNECTION_BAD state.)  This allows developers to reconnect with
just \c after a database crash and restart.

It's tempting to use the same approach instead of closing the old
connection after a failed non-interactive \connect command.  However,
that would not be very safe: consider a script containing
	\c db1 user1 live_server
	\c db2 user2 dead_server
	\c db3
The script would be expecting to connect to db3 at dead_server, but
if we re-use parameters from the first connection then it might
successfully connect to db3 at live_server.  This'd defeat the goal
of not letting a script accidentally execute commands against the
wrong database.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/38464.1603394584@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-10-23 17:07:15 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas 902b57c9bf doc: Remove reference to pre-8.2 pg_dump behaviour
The behavioural change in the -t/--table option happened around 15 years
ago and there seems little point in keeping it around.

Author: Ian Barwick
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB8KJ%3Dh-XALik4M7gv-pX48%3D%2BSPWexfaYwa%2ByTnPwD3DxceXrg%40mail.gmail.com
2020-10-23 11:49:59 +03:00
Tom Lane 94929f1cf6 Clean up some unpleasant behaviors in psql's \connect command.
The check for whether to complain about not having an old connection
to get parameters from was seriously out of date: it had not been
rethought when we invented connstrings, nor when we invented the
-reuse-previous option.  Replace it with a check that throws an
error if reuse-previous is active and we lack an old connection to
reuse.  While that doesn't move the goalposts very far in terms of
easing reconnection after a server crash, at least it's consistent.

If the user specifies a connstring plus additional parameters
(which is invalid per the documentation), the extra parameters were
silently ignored.  That seems like it could be really confusing,
so let's throw a syntax error instead.

Teach the connstring code path to re-use the old connection's password
in the same cases as the old-style-syntax code path would, ie if we
are reusing parameters and the values of username, host/hostaddr, and
port are not being changed.  Document this behavior, too, since it was
unmentioned before.  Also simplify the implementation a bit, giving
rise to two new and useful properties: if there's a "password=xxx" in
the connstring, we'll use it not ignore it, and by default (i.e.,
except with --no-password) we will prompt for a password if the
re-used password or connstring password doesn't work.  The previous
code just failed if the re-used password didn't work.

Given the paucity of field complaints about these issues, I don't
think that they rise to the level of back-patchable bug fixes,
and in any case they might represent undesirable behavior changes
in minor releases.  So no back-patch.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/235210.1603321144@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-10-22 14:04:28 -04:00
Tom Lane 85c54287af Fix connection string handling in psql's \connect command.
psql's \connect claims to be able to re-use previous connection
parameters, but in fact it only re-uses the database name, user name,
host name (and possibly hostaddr, depending on version), and port.
This is problematic for assorted use cases.  Notably, pg_dump[all]
emits "\connect databasename" commands which we would like to have
re-use all other parameters.  If such a script is loaded in a psql run
that initially had "-d connstring" with some non-default parameters,
those other parameters would be lost, potentially causing connection
failure.  (Thus, this is the same kind of bug addressed in commits
a45bc8a4f and 8e5793ab6, although the details are much different.)

To fix, redesign do_connect() so that it pulls out all properties
of the old PGconn using PQconninfo(), and then replaces individual
properties in that array.  In the case where we don't wish to re-use
anything, get libpq's default settings using PQconndefaults() and
replace entries in that, so that we don't need different code paths
for the two cases.

This does result in an additional behavioral change for cases where
the original connection parameters allowed multiple hosts, say
"psql -h host1,host2", and the \connect request allows re-use of the
host setting.  Because the previous coding relied on PQhost(), it
would only permit reconnection to the same host originally selected.
Although one can think of scenarios where that's a good thing, there
are others where it is not.  Moreover, that behavior doesn't seem to
meet the principle of least surprise, nor was it documented; nor is
it even clear it was intended, since that coding long pre-dates the
addition of multi-host support to libpq.  Hence, this patch is content
to drop it and re-use the host list as given.

Per Peter Eisentraut's comments on bug #16604.  Back-patch to all
supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16604-933f4b8791227b15@postgresql.org
2020-10-21 16:19:00 -04:00
Tom Lane 8e5793ab60 Fix connection string handling in src/bin/scripts/ programs.
When told to process all databases, clusterdb, reindexdb, and vacuumdb
would reconnect by replacing their --maintenance-db parameter with the
name of the target database.  If that parameter is a connstring (which
has been allowed for a long time, though we failed to document that
before this patch), we'd lose any other options it might specify, for
example SSL or GSS parameters, possibly resulting in failure to connect.
Thus, this is the same bug as commit a45bc8a4f fixed in pg_dump and
pg_restore.  We can fix it in the same way, by using libpq's rules for
handling multiple "dbname" parameters to add the target database name
separately.  I chose to apply the same refactoring approach as in that
patch, with a struct to handle the command line parameters that need to
be passed through to connectDatabase.  (Maybe someday we can unify the
very similar functions here and in pg_dump/pg_restore.)

Per Peter Eisentraut's comments on bug #16604.  Back-patch to all
supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16604-933f4b8791227b15@postgresql.org
2020-10-19 19:03:46 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas c5f42daa60 Misc documentation fixes.
- Misc grammar and punctuation fixes.

- Stylistic cleanup: use spaces between function arguments and JSON fields
  in examples. For example "foo(a,b)" -> "foo(a, b)". Add semicolon after
  last END in a few PL/pgSQL examples that were missing them.

- Make sentence that talked about "..." and ".." operators more clear,
  by avoiding to end the sentence with "..". That makes it look the same
  as "..."

- Fix syntax description for HAVING: HAVING conditions cannot be repeated

Patch by Justin Pryzby, per Yaroslav Schekin's report. Backpatch to all
supported versions, to the extent that the patch applies easily.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20201005191922.GE17626%40telsasoft.com
2020-10-19 19:28:54 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas 2a972e0165 Fix TRUNCATE doc: ALTER SEQUENCE RESTART is now transactional.
ALTER SEQUENCE RESTART was made transactional in commit 3d79013b97.
Backpatch to v10, where that was introduced.

Patch by Justin Pryzby, per Yaroslav Schekin's report.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20201005191922.GE17626%40telsasoft.com
2020-10-19 19:02:25 +03:00
Amit Kapila 560d260d78 Change the docs for PARALLEL option of Vacuum.
The rules to choose the number of parallel workers to perform parallel
vacuum operation were not clearly specified.

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Author: Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 13, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/36aa8aea-61b7-eb3c-263b-648e0cb117b7@2ndquadrant.com
2020-10-19 09:13:17 +05:30
Fujii Masao 564a410c81 doc: Mention that toast_tuple_target affects also column marked as Main.
Previously it was documented that toast_tuple_target affected column
marked as only External or Extended. But this description is not correct
and toast_tuple_target affects also column marked as Main.

Back-patch to v11 where toast_tuple_target reloption was introduced.

Author: Shinya Okano
Reviewed-by: Tatsuhito Kasahara, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/93f46e311a67422e89e770d236059817@oss.nttdata.com
2020-10-15 11:04:07 +09:00
Tom Lane 78c0b6ed27 Re-allow testing of GiST buffered builds.
Commit 16fa9b2b3 broke the ability to reliably test GiST buffered builds,
because it caused sorted builds to be done instead if sortsupport is
available, regardless of any attempt to override that.  While a would-be
test case could try to work around that by choosing an opclass that has
no sortsupport function, coverage would be silently lost the moment
someone decides it'd be a good idea to add a sortsupport function.

Hence, rearrange the logic in gistbuild() so that if "buffering = on"
is specified in CREATE INDEX, we will use that method, sortsupport or no.

Also document the interaction between sorting and the buffering
parameter, as 16fa9b2b3 failed to do.

(Note that in fact we still lack any test coverage of buffered builds,
but this is a prerequisite to adding a non-fragile test.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3249980.1602532990@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-10-12 17:09:50 -04:00
Magnus Hagander 1b22224945 Further improvements on documentation for pg_dump -t
Ian submitted an updated patch just as I was pushing the previous one,
so use this newer wording instead.

Author: Ian Barwick
2020-10-06 15:50:03 +02:00
Magnus Hagander b8c4d38512 Clarify documentation around pg_dump -t option
The behavior is different for different types of objects, so make that
more clear.

Author: Ian Barwick
2020-10-06 15:46:36 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 2453ea1422 Support for OUT parameters in procedures
Unlike for functions, OUT parameters for procedures are part of the
signature.  Therefore, they have to be listed in pg_proc.proargtypes
as well as mentioned in ALTER PROCEDURE and DROP PROCEDURE.

Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/2b8490fe-51af-e671-c504-47359dc453c5@2ndquadrant.com
2020-10-05 09:21:43 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 9081bddbd7 Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation
SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link
to a reference page is used using <xref>.  But the latter doesn't
create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a
paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links.

We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target
side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere.
Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side.

We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow
this.  DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend
attribute itself, but we are not there yet.

So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus
<command>.  This gives the correct look and also gives some more
flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or
other clauses).  In the future, these could then be converted to
DocBook 5 style.

I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference
pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text
or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a
bit better.  Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in
those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain
<command>.  In cases where we just want the link and don't
specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased
"for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept.

Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:40:02 +02:00
Bruce Momjian 1a9388bd0f doc: libpq connection options can override command-line flags
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16486-b9c93d71c02c4907@postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-10-02 22:19:31 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 300b6984a5 Fix XML id to match GUC name
For some reason, the id of the description of
max_parallel_maintenance_workers has been
guc-max-parallel-workers-maintenance since the beginning.  Flip that
around to make it consistent.
2020-09-30 07:39:38 +02:00
Tom Lane 9436041ed8 Copy editing: fix a bunch of misspellings and poor wording.
99% of this is docs, but also a couple of comments.  No code changes.

Justin Pryzby

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200919175804.GE30557@telsasoft.com
2020-09-21 12:43:42 -04:00
Tom Lane 1ed6b89563 Remove support for postfix (right-unary) operators.
This feature has been a thorn in our sides for a long time, causing
many grammatical ambiguity problems.  It doesn't seem worth the
pain to continue to support it, so remove it.

There are some follow-on improvements we can make in the grammar,
but this commit only removes the bare minimum number of productions,
plus assorted backend support code.

Note that pg_dump and psql continue to have full support, since
they may be used against older servers.  However, pg_dump warns
about postfix operators.  There is also a check in pg_upgrade.

Documentation-wise, I (tgl) largely removed the "left unary"
terminology in favor of saying "prefix operator", which is
a more standard and IMO less confusing term.

I included a catversion bump, although no initial catalog data
changes here, to mark the boundary at which oprkind = 'r'
stopped being valid in pg_operator.

Mark Dilger, based on work by myself and Robert Haas;
review by John Naylor

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/38ca86db-42ab-9b48-2902-337a0d6b8311@2ndquadrant.com
2020-09-17 19:38:05 -04:00
Tom Lane 99175141c9 Improve common/logging.c's support for multiple verbosity levels.
Instead of hard-wiring specific verbosity levels into the option
processing of client applications, invent pg_logging_increase_verbosity()
and encourage clients to implement --verbose by calling that.  Then,
the common convention that more -v's gets you more verbosity just works.

In particular, this allows resurrection of the debug-grade messages that
have long existed in pg_dump and its siblings.  They were unreachable
before this commit due to lack of a way to select PG_LOG_DEBUG logging
level.  (It appears that they may have been unreachable for some time
before common/logging.c was introduced, too, so I'm not specifically
blaming cc8d41511 for the oversight.  One reason for thinking that is
that it's now apparent that _allocAH()'s message needs a null-pointer
guard.  Testing might have failed to reveal that before 96bf88d52.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1173106.1600116625@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-09-17 12:52:18 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 45b9805706 Allow CURRENT_ROLE where CURRENT_USER is accepted
In the particular case of GRANTED BY, this is specified in the SQL
standard.  Since in PostgreSQL, CURRENT_ROLE is equivalent to
CURRENT_USER, and CURRENT_USER is already supported here, adding
CURRENT_ROLE is trivial.  The other cases are PostgreSQL extensions,
but for the same reason it also makes sense there.

Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Reviewed-by: Asif Rehman <asifr.rehman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/f2feac44-b4c5-f38f-3699-2851d6a76dc9%402ndquadrant.com
2020-09-17 11:40:08 +02:00
Michael Paquier aad546bd0a doc: Fix some grammar and inconsistencies
Some comments are fixed while on it.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200818171702.GK17022@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 9.6
2020-09-10 15:50:19 +09:00
Michael Paquier a6642b3ae0 Add support for partitioned tables and indexes in REINDEX
Until now, REINDEX was not able to work with partitioned tables and
indexes, forcing users to reindex partitions one by one.  This extends
REINDEX INDEX and REINDEX TABLE so as they can accept a partitioned
index and table in input, respectively, to reindex all the partitions
assigned to them with physical storage (foreign tables, partitioned
tables and indexes are then discarded).

This shares some logic with schema and database REINDEX as each
partition gets processed in its own transaction after building a list of
relations to work on.  This choice has the advantage to minimize the
number of invalid indexes to one partition with REINDEX CONCURRENTLY in
the event a cancellation or failure in-flight, as the only indexes
handled at once in a single REINDEX CONCURRENTLY loop are the ones from
the partition being working on.

Isolation tests are added to emulate some cases I bumped into while
developing this feature, particularly with the concurrent drop of a
leaf partition reindexed.  However, this is rather limited as LOCK would
cause REINDEX to block in the first transaction building the list of
partitions.

Per its multi-transaction nature, this new flavor cannot run in a
transaction block, similarly to REINDEX SCHEMA, SYSTEM and DATABASE.

Author: Justin Pryzby, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/db12e897-73ff-467e-94cb-4af03705435f.adger.lj@alibaba-inc.com
2020-09-08 10:09:22 +09:00
Michael Paquier f0942b1327 doc: Tweak sentence for pg_checksums when enabling checksums
The previous version of the docs mentioned that files are rewritten,
implying that a second copy of each file gets created, but each file is
updated in-place.

Author: Michael Banck
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/858086b6a42fb7d17995b6175856f7e7ec44d0a2.camel@credativ.de
Backpatch-through: 12
2020-09-07 14:34:59 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 4220e5721a Fix XML id to match containing page
This was apparently a typo when this part of the documentation was
first added.
2020-09-03 12:47:33 +02:00
Amit Kapila 464824323e Add support for streaming to built-in logical replication.
To add support for streaming of in-progress transactions into the
built-in logical replication, we need to do three things:

* Extend the logical replication protocol, so identify in-progress
transactions, and allow adding additional bits of information (e.g.
XID of subtransactions).

* Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new stream
API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol.

* Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle streamed
in-progress transaction by spilling the data to disk and then
replaying them on commit.

We however must explicitly disable streaming replication during
replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We
don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase,
and moreover we don't have a replication connection open so we
don't have where to send the data anyway.

Author: Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Kuntal Ghosh and Ajin Cherian
Tested-by: Neha Sharma, Mahendra Singh Thalor and Ajin Cherian
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/688b0b7f-2f6c-d827-c27b-216a8e3ea700@2ndquadrant.com
2020-09-03 07:54:07 +05:30
Michael Paquier 07f386ede0 Add access method names to \d[i|m|t]+ in psql
Listing a full set of relations with those psql meta-commands, without a
matching pattern, has never showed the access method associated with
each relation.  This commit adds the access method of tables, indexes
and matviews, masking it for relation kinds where it does not apply.

Note that when HIDE_TABLEAM is enabled, the information does not show
up.  This is available when connecting to a backend version of at least
12, where table AMs have been introduced.

Author: Georgios Kokolatos
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Michael Paquier, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/svaS1VTOEscES9CLKVTeKItjJP1EEJuBhTsA0ESOdlnbXeQSgycYwVlliL5zt8Jwcfo4ATYDXtEqsExxjkSkkhCSTCL8fnRgaCAJdr0unUg=@protonmail.com
2020-09-02 16:59:22 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera afc7e0ad55
Raise error on concurrent drop of partitioned index
We were already raising an error for DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY on a
partitioned table, albeit a different and confusing one:
  ERROR:  DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY must be first action in transaction

Change that to throw a more comprehensible error:
  ERROR:  cannot drop partitioned index \"%s\" concurrently

Michael Paquier authored the test case for indexes on temporary
partitioned tables.

Backpatch to 11, where indexes on partitioned tables were added.

Reported-by: Jan Mussler <jan.mussler@zalando.de>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16594-d2956ca909585067@postgresql.org
2020-09-01 13:40:43 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 953c64e0f6 doc: add commas after 'i.e.' and 'e.g.'
This follows the American format,
https://jakubmarian.com/comma-after-i-e-and-e-g/. There is no intention
of requiring this format for future text, but making existing text
consistent every few years makes sense.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200825183619.GA22369@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-08-31 18:33:37 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 50ed605b3e pg_upgrade doc: mention saving postgresql.conf.auto files
Also mention files included by postgresql.conf.

Reported-by: Álvaro Herrera

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/08AD4526-75AB-457B-B2DD-099663F28040@yesql.se

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-08-31 17:36:23 -04:00
Tom Lane 6ca547cf75 Mark factorial operator, and postfix operators in general, as deprecated.
Per discussion, we're planning to remove parser support for postfix
operators in order to simplify the grammar.  So it behooves us to
put out a deprecation notice at least one release before that.

There is only one built-in postfix operator, ! for factorial.
Label it deprecated in the docs and in pg_description, and adjust
some examples that formerly relied on it.  (The sister prefix
operator !! is also deprecated.  We don't really have to remove
that one, but since we're suggesting that people use factorial()
instead, it seems better to remove both operators.)

Also state in the CREATE OPERATOR ref page that postfix operators
in general are going away.

Although this changes the initial contents of pg_description,
I did not force a catversion bump; it doesn't seem essential.

In v13, also back-patch 4c5cf5431, so that there's someplace for
the <link>s to point to.

Mark Dilger and John Naylor, with some adjustments by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/BE2DF53D-251A-4E26-972F-930E523580E9@enterprisedb.com
2020-08-30 14:37:24 -04:00
Bruce Momjian bfd78c0b41 docs: add COMMENT examples for new features, rename rtree
Reported-by: Jürgen Purtz

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15ec5428-d46a-1725-f38d-44986a977abb@purtz.de

Author: Jürgen Purtz

Backpatch-through: 11
2020-08-21 18:29:37 -04:00
Fujii Masao 9d701e624f Rework EXPLAIN for planner's buffer usage.
Commit ce77abe63c allowed EXPLAIN (BUFFERS) to report the information
on buffer usage during planning phase. However three issues were
reported regarding this feature.

(1) Previously, EXPLAIN option BUFFERS required ANALYZE. So the query
    had to be actually executed by specifying ANALYZE even when we
    want to see only the planner's buffer usage. This was inconvenient
    especially when the query was write one like DELETE.

(2) EXPLAIN included the planner's buffer usage in summary
    information. So SUMMARY option had to be enabled to report that.
    Also this format was confusing.

(3) The output structure for planning information was not consistent
    between TEXT format and the others. For example, "Planning" tag
    was output in JSON format, but not in TEXT format.

For (1), this commit allows us to perform EXPLAIN (BUFFERS) without
ANALYZE to report the planner's buffer usage.

For (2), this commit changed EXPLAIN output so that the planner's
buffer usage is reported before summary information.

For (3), this commit made the output structure for planning
information more consistent between the formats.

Back-patch to v13 where the planner's buffer usage was allowed to
be reported in EXPLAIN.

Reported-by: Pierre Giraud, David Rowley
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Julien Rouhaud, Pierre Giraud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/07b226e6-fa49-687f-b110-b7c37572f69e@dalibo.com
2020-08-21 20:48:59 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 0784c33372
Revise REINDEX CONCURRENTLY recovery instructions
When the leftover invalid index is "ccold", there's no need to re-run
the command.  Reword the instructions to make that explicit.

Backpatch to 12, where REINDEX CONCURRENTLY appeared.

Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200819211312.GA15497@alvherre.pgsql
2020-08-20 13:49:04 -04:00
Tom Lane db659a3416 Doc: various improvements for pg_basebackup reference page.
Put the -r option in the right section (it certainly isn't an
option controlling "the location and format of the output").

Clarify the behavior of the tablespace and waldir options
(that part per gripe from robert@interactive.co.uk).

Make a large number of small copy-editing fixes in text that
visibly wasn't written by native speakers, and try to avoid
grammatical inconsistencies between the descriptions of
the different options.

Back-patch to v13, since HEAD hasn't meaningfully diverged yet.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/159749418850.14322.216503677134569752@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2020-08-15 15:44:23 -04:00
Tom Lane 0038f94387 Fix postmaster's behavior during smart shutdown.
Up to now, upon receipt of a SIGTERM ("smart shutdown" command), the
postmaster has immediately killed all "optional" background processes,
and subsequently refused to launch new ones while it's waiting for
foreground client processes to exit.  No doubt this seemed like an OK
policy at some point; but it's a pretty bad one now, because it makes
for a seriously degraded environment for the remaining clients:

* Parallel queries are killed, and new ones fail to launch. (And our
parallel-query infrastructure utterly fails to deal with the case
in a reasonable way --- it just hangs waiting for workers that are
not going to arrive.  There is more work needed in that area IMO.)

* Autovacuum ceases to function.  We can tolerate that for awhile,
but if bulk-update queries continue to run in the surviving client
sessions, there's eventually going to be a mess.  In the worst case
the system could reach a forced shutdown to prevent XID wraparound.

* The bgwriter and walwriter are also stopped immediately, likely
resulting in performance degradation.

Hence, let's rearrange things so that the only immediate change in
behavior is refusing to let in new normal connections.  Once the last
normal connection is gone, shut everything down as though we'd received
a "fast" shutdown.  To implement this, remove the PM_WAIT_BACKUP and
PM_WAIT_READONLY states, instead staying in PM_RUN or PM_HOT_STANDBY
while normal connections remain.  A subsidiary state variable tracks
whether or not we're letting in new connections in those states.

This also allows having just one copy of the logic for killing child
processes in smart and fast shutdown modes.  I moved that logic into
PostmasterStateMachine() by inventing a new state PM_STOP_BACKENDS.

Back-patch to 9.6 where parallel query was added.  In principle
this'd be a good idea in 9.5 as well, but the risk/reward ratio
is not as good there, since lack of autovacuum is not a problem
during typical uses of smart shutdown.

Per report from Bharath Rupireddy.

Patch by me, reviewed by Thomas Munro

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXAZ5vKxT9P7P89D87i3MDO9bfS+_bjMHgnWJs8uwUOOw@mail.gmail.com
2020-08-14 13:26:57 -04:00
Tom Lane 7eeb1d9861 Make contrib modules' installation scripts more secure.
Hostile objects located within the installation-time search_path could
capture references in an extension's installation or upgrade script.
If the extension is being installed with superuser privileges, this
opens the door to privilege escalation.  While such hazards have existed
all along, their urgency increases with the v13 "trusted extensions"
feature, because that lets a non-superuser control the installation path
for a superuser-privileged script.  Therefore, make a number of changes
to make such situations more secure:

* Tweak the construction of the installation-time search_path to ensure
that references to objects in pg_catalog can't be subverted; and
explicitly add pg_temp to the end of the path to prevent attacks using
temporary objects.

* Disable check_function_bodies within installation/upgrade scripts,
so that any security gaps in SQL-language or PL-language function bodies
cannot create a risk of unwanted installation-time code execution.

* Adjust lookup of type input/receive functions and join estimator
functions to complain if there are multiple candidate functions.  This
prevents capture of references to functions whose signature is not the
first one checked; and it's arguably more user-friendly anyway.

* Modify various contrib upgrade scripts to ensure that catalog
modification queries are executed with secure search paths.  (These
are in-place modifications with no extension version changes, since
it is the update process itself that is at issue, not the end result.)

Extensions that depend on other extensions cannot be made fully secure
by these methods alone; therefore, revert the "trusted" marking that
commit eb67623c9 applied to earthdistance and hstore_plperl, pending
some better solution to that set of issues.

Also add documentation around these issues, to help extension authors
write secure installation scripts.

Patch by me, following an observation by Andres Freund; thanks
to Noah Misch for review.

Security: CVE-2020-14350
2020-08-10 10:44:42 -04:00
Tom Lane 533020d050 Fix minor issues in psql's new \dAc and related commands.
The type-name pattern in \dAc and \dAf was matched only to the actual
pg_type.typname string, which is fairly user-unfriendly in cases where
that is not what's shown to the user by format_type (compare "_int4"
and "integer[]").  Make this code match what \dT does, i.e. match the
pattern against either typname or format_type() output.  Also fix its
broken handling of schema-name restrictions.  (IOW, make these
processSQLNamePattern calls match \dT's.)  While here, adjust
whitespace to make the query a little prettier in -E output, too.

Also improve some inaccuracies and shaky grammar in the related
documentation.

Noted while working on a patch for intarray's opclasses; I wondered
why I couldn't get a match to "integer*" for the input type name.
2020-08-02 17:00:26 -04:00
Peter Geoghegan d6c08e29e7 Add hash_mem_multiplier GUC.
Add a GUC that acts as a multiplier on work_mem.  It gets applied when
sizing executor node hash tables that were previously size constrained
using work_mem alone.

The new GUC can be used to preferentially give hash-based nodes more
memory than the generic work_mem limit.  It is intended to enable admin
tuning of the executor's memory usage.  Overall system throughput and
system responsiveness can be improved by giving hash-based executor
nodes more memory (especially over sort-based alternatives, which are
often much less sensitive to being memory constrained).

The default value for hash_mem_multiplier is 1.0, which is also the
minimum valid value.  This means that hash-based nodes continue to apply
work_mem in the traditional way by default.

hash_mem_multiplier is generally useful.  However, it is being added now
due to concerns about hash aggregate performance stability for users
that upgrade to Postgres 13 (which added disk-based hash aggregation in
commit 1f39bce0).  While the old hash aggregate behavior risked
out-of-memory errors, it is nevertheless likely that many users actually
benefited.  Hash agg's previous indifference to work_mem during query
execution was not just faster; it also accidentally made aggregation
resilient to grouping estimate problems (at least in cases where this
didn't create destabilizing memory pressure).

hash_mem_multiplier can provide a certain kind of continuity with the
behavior of Postgres 12 hash aggregates in cases where the planner
incorrectly estimates that all groups (plus related allocations) will
fit in work_mem/hash_mem.  This seems necessary because hash-based
aggregation is usually much slower when only a small fraction of all
groups can fit.  Even when it isn't possible to totally avoid hash
aggregates that spill, giving hash aggregation more memory will reliably
improve performance (the same cannot be said for external sort
operations, which appear to be almost unaffected by memory availability
provided it's at least possible to get a single merge pass).

The PostgreSQL 13 release notes should advise users that increasing
hash_mem_multiplier can help with performance regressions associated
with hash aggregation.  That can be taken care of by a later commit.

Author: Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Álvaro Herrera, Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200625203629.7m6yvut7eqblgmfo@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzmD%2Bi1pG6rc1%2BCjc4V6EaFJ_qSuKCCHVnH%3DoruqD-zqow%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 13-, where disk-based hash aggregation was introduced.
2020-07-29 14:14:58 -07:00
Peter Geoghegan f36e82072c Doc: Remove obsolete CREATE AGGREGATE note.
The planner is in fact willing to use hash aggregation when work_mem is
not set high enough for everything to fit in memory.  This has been the
case since commit 1f39bce0, which added disk-based hash aggregation.

There are a few remaining cases in which hash aggregation is avoided as
a matter of policy when the planner surmises that spilling will be
necessary.  For example, callers of choose_hashed_setop() still
conservatively avoid hash aggregation when spilling is anticipated.
That doesn't seem like a good enough reason to mention hash aggregation
in this context.

Backpatch: 13-, where disk-based hash aggregation was introduced.
2020-07-28 16:59:01 -07:00
Fujii Masao c3fe108c02 Rename wal_keep_segments to wal_keep_size.
max_slot_wal_keep_size that was added in v13 and wal_keep_segments are
the GUC parameters to specify how much WAL files to retain for
the standby servers. While max_slot_wal_keep_size accepts the number of
bytes of WAL files, wal_keep_segments accepts the number of WAL files.
This difference of setting units between those similar parameters could
be confusing to users.

To alleviate this situation, this commit renames wal_keep_segments to
wal_keep_size, and make users specify the WAL size in it instead of
the number of WAL files.

There was also the idea to rename max_slot_wal_keep_size to
max_slot_wal_keep_segments, in the discussion. But we have been moving
away from measuring in segments, for example, checkpoint_segments was
replaced by max_wal_size. So we concluded to rename wal_keep_segments
to wal_keep_size.

Back-patch to v13 where max_slot_wal_keep_size was added.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi, David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/574b4ea3-e0f9-b175-ead2-ebea7faea855@oss.nttdata.com
2020-07-20 13:30:18 +09:00
Tom Lane 9de77b5453 Allow logical replication to transfer data in binary format.
This patch adds a "binary" option to CREATE/ALTER SUBSCRIPTION.
When that's set, the publisher will send data using the data type's
typsend function if any, rather than typoutput.  This is generally
faster, if slightly less robust.

As committed, we won't try to transfer user-defined array or composite
types in binary, for fear that type OIDs won't match at the subscriber.
This might be changed later, but it seems like fit material for a
follow-on patch.

Dave Cramer, reviewed by Daniel Gustafsson, Petr Jelinek, and others;
adjusted some by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADK3HH+R3xMn=8t3Ct+uD+qJ1KD=Hbif5NFMJ+d5DkoCzp6Vgw@mail.gmail.com
2020-07-18 12:44:51 -04:00
Michael Paquier b74d449a02 doc: Fix description of \copy for psql
The WHERE clause introduced by 31f3817 was not described.  While on it,
split the grammar of \copy FROM and TO into two distinct parts for
clarity as they support different set of options.

Author: Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm3zWr=OmxeNqOqfT=uZTSdam_j-gkX94CL8eTNfgUtf6A@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
2020-07-18 10:42:41 +09:00
Tom Lane f009591d6e Cope with data-offset-less archive files during out-of-order restores.
pg_dump produces custom-format archive files that lack data offsets
when it is unable to seek its output.  Up to now that's been a hazard
for pg_restore.  But if pg_restore is able to seek in the archive
file, there is no reason to throw up our hands when asked to restore
data blocks out of order.  Instead, whenever we are searching for a
data block, record the locations of the blocks we passed over (that
is, fill in the missing data-offset fields in our in-memory copy of
the TOC data).  Then, when we hit a case that requires going
backwards, we can just seek back.

Also track the furthest point that we've searched to, and seek back
to there when beginning a search for a new data block.  This avoids
possible O(N^2) time consumption, by ensuring that each data block
is examined at most twice.  (On Unix systems, that's at most twice
per parallel-restore job; but since Windows uses threads here, the
threads can share block location knowledge, reducing the amount of
duplicated work.)

We can also improve the code a bit by using fseeko() to skip over
data blocks during the search.

This is all of some use even in simple restores, but it's really
significant for parallel pg_restore.  In that case, we require
seekability of the input already, and we will very probably need
to do out-of-order restores.

Back-patch to v12, as this fixes a regression introduced by commit
548e50976.  Before that, parallel restore avoided requesting
out-of-order restores, so it would work on a data-offset-less
archive.  Now it will again.

Ideally this patch would include some test coverage, but there are
other open bugs that need to be fixed before we can extend our
coverage of parallel restore very much.  Plan to revisit that later.

David Gilman and Tom Lane; reviewed by Justin Pryzby

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALBH9DDuJ+scZc4MEvw5uO-=vRyR2=QF9+Yh=3hPEnKHWfS81A@mail.gmail.com
2020-07-17 13:04:05 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 64fe120b57 doc: Add link from pg_dump --encoding to supported encodings
Reported-by: Lee Dong Wook <sh95119@gmail.com>
2020-07-11 13:47:29 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 72a16cb3ee Add missing <application> tags in application doc <refentrytitle>s
Most of them already have this, but some were missing.

Author: Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf%40wibble.ilmari.org
2020-07-10 16:51:29 +02:00
Andres Freund 9e101cf606 docs: replace 'master' with 'primary' where appropriate.
Also changed "in the primary" to "on the primary", and added a few
"the" before "primary".

Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200615182235.x7lch5n6kcjq4aue@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-07-08 13:03:32 -07:00
Andres Freund e07633646a code: replace 'master' with 'leader' where appropriate.
Leader already is the more widely used terminology, but a few places
didn't get the message.

Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200615182235.x7lch5n6kcjq4aue@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-07-08 12:58:32 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut 90b2d8c1ad doc: Spell checking 2020-07-05 15:37:57 +02:00
Bruce Momjian aa90d9957b doc: clarify that storage parameter values are optional
In a few cases, the documented syntax specified storage parameter values
as required.

Reported-by: galiev_mr@taximaxim.ru

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/159283163235.684.4482737698910467437@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-06-30 12:26:51 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 2a06cb86db doc: change pg_upgrade wal_level to be not minimal
Previously it was specified to be only replica.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200618180058.GK7349@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-06-30 11:55:53 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 81d46ea12c doc: mention trigger helper functions in CREATE TRIGGER docs
Reported-by: petermpallesen@gmail.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/159195294959.673.5752624528747900508@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-06-25 18:33:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian d352de8d8e docs: clarify that CREATE DATABASE does not copy db permissions
That is, those database permissions set by GRANT.

Diagnosed-by: Joseph Nahmias

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200614072613.GA21852@nahmias.net

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-06-25 18:22:44 -04:00
Michael Paquier 9550ea3027 Add --no-index-cleanup and --no-truncate to vacuumdb.
Both INDEX_CLEANUP and TRUNCATE have been available since v12, and are
enabled by default except if respectively vacuum_index_cleanup and
vacuum_truncate are disabled for a given relation.  This change adds
support for disabling these options from vacuumdb.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6F7F17EF-B1F2-4681-8D03-BA96365717C0@amazon.com
2020-06-22 13:23:38 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 5333e014ab Remove deprecated syntax from CREATE/DROP LANGUAGE
Remove the option to specify the language name as a single-quoted
string.  This has been obsolete since ee8ed85da3.  Removing it allows
better grammar refactoring.

The syntax of the CREATE FUNCTION LANGUAGE clause is not changed.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/163c00a5-f634-ca52-fc7c-0e53deda8735%402ndquadrant.com
2020-06-11 10:26:12 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut a02b8bdd98 doc: Fix man page whitespace issues
Whitespace between tags is significant, and in some cases it creates
extra vertical space in man pages.  The fix is either to remove some
newlines or in some cases to reword slightly to avoid the awkward
markup layout.
2020-06-07 14:54:28 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut b25da86615 doc: Move options on man pages into more alphabetical order 2020-06-07 14:07:33 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut b79cb8a919 doc: Trim trailing whitespace 2020-06-07 13:24:40 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut ab5b55505e doc: Remove line breaks after <title>
This creates unnecessary rendering problem risks, and it's
inconsistent and gets copied around.
2020-06-07 13:12:08 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut f5067049cd psql: Clean up terminology in \dAp command
The preferred terminology has been support "function", not procedure,
for some time, so change that over.  The command stays \dAp, since
\dAf is already something else.
2020-06-04 22:09:41 +02:00
Michael Paquier 9b60c4b979 Doc: Mention about caveats of --concurrently on reindexdb page
The documentation of REINDEX includes a complete description of
CONCURRENTLY and its advantages as well as its disadvantages, but
reindexdb was not really clear about all that.

From discussion with Tom Lane, based on a report from Andrey Klychkov.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1590486572.205117372@f500.i.mail.ru
Backpatch-through: 12
2020-05-31 10:48:21 +09:00
Fujii Masao 92f9468657 doc: Update the layout of "Viewing Statistics" section.
This commit updates the "Viewing Statistics" section more like
the existing catalogs chapter.

- Change its layout so that an introductory paragrap is put above
   the table for each statistics view. Previously the explanations
   were below the tables.

- Separate each view to different section and add index terms for them.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6f8a482c-b3fa-4ed9-21c3-6d222a2cb87d@oss.nttdata.com
2020-05-29 17:14:33 +09:00
Fujii Masao eaae947e2b doc: Add note about I/O timing information in EXPLAIN and pg_stat_database.
Explain that the followings are tracked only when track_io_timing GUC
is enabled.

- blk_read_time and blk_write_time in pg_stat_database
- time spent reading and writing data file blocks in EXPLAIN output
   with BUFFERS option

Whther track_io_timing is enabled affects also blk_read_time and
blk_write_time in pg_stat_statements, but which was already documented.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYHo_NwbxpLH76OGF-O=13tkR0ZM0zeyGEhZ+JEXZVRyCA@mail.gmail.com
2020-05-22 23:33:58 +09:00
Bruce Momjian e936fcb54d doc: remove extra blank line at the top of SGML files
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-05-15 09:55:43 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 8d4b23fcae doc: make ref/*.sgml file header comment layout consistent 2020-05-15 08:52:24 -04:00
Tom Lane 3d14c174cb Doc: tweak examples to silence line-too-long PDF build warnings.
In one or two places it seemed reasonable to modify the example so as
to shorten its output slightly; but for the most part I just added a
&zwsp; after 67 characters, which is the most we can fit on a line
of monospace text in A4 format.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6916.1589146280@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-05-14 18:13:08 -04:00
Tom Lane 60c90c16c1 Doc: fix "Unresolved ID reference" warnings, clean up man page cross-refs.
Use xreflabel attributes instead of endterm attributes to control the
appearance of links to subsections of SQL command reference pages.
This is simpler, it matches what we do elsewhere (e.g. for GUC variables),
and it doesn't draw "Unresolved ID reference" warnings from the PDF
toolchain.

Fix some places where the text was absolutely dependent on an <xref>
rendering exactly so, by using a <link> around the required text
instead.  At least one of those spots had already been turned into
bad grammar by subsequent changes, and the whole idea is just too
fragile for my taste.  <xref> does NOT have fixed output, don't write
as if it does.

Consistently include a page-level link in cross-man-page references,
because otherwise they are useless/nonsensical in man-page output.
Likewise, be consistent about mentioning "below" or "above" in same-page
references; we were doing that in about 90% of the cases, but now it's
100%.

Also get rid of another nonfunctional-in-PDF idea, of making
cross-references to functions by sticking ID tags on <row> constructs.
We can put the IDs on <indexterm>s instead --- which is probably not any
more sensible in abstract terms, but it works where the other doesn't.
(There is talk of attaching cross-reference IDs to most or all of
the docs' function descriptions, but for now I just fixed the two
that exist.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/14480.1589154358@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-05-11 14:15:55 -04:00
Tom Lane b2fd8ebe23 Doc: update remaining tables of functions/operators for new layout.
This converts the contrib documentation to the new style, and mops up
a couple of function tables that were outside chapter 9 in the main
docs.

A few contrib modules choose not to present their functions in the
standard tabular format.  There might be room to rethink those decisions
now that the standard format is more friendly to verbose descriptions.
But I have not undertaken to do that here; I just converted existing
tables.
2020-05-07 14:25:25 -04:00
Bruce Momjian c3d1fdb598 pgbench: document that the default data loading is client-side
Reported-by: Fabien COELHO

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.22.394.2005051811320.2183756@pseudo
2020-05-06 19:07:29 -04:00
Michael Paquier c5114e42fa Doc: Outline REPLICATION before SUPERUSER privilege
The following docs are updated:
- High-availaility section
- pg_basebackup
- pg_receivewal

Per the principle of least privilege, we want to encourage users to
interact with those areas using roles that have replication rights, but
superusers were mentioned first.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ECEBD212-7101-41EB-84F3-2F356E4B6401@yesql.se
2020-05-05 14:16:01 +09:00
Amit Kapila 69bfaf2e1d Change the display of WAL usage statistics in Explain.
In commit 33e05f89c5, we have added the option to display WAL usage
statistics in Explain and auto_explain.  The display format used two spaces
between each field which is inconsistent with Buffer usage statistics which
is using one space between each field.  Change the format to make WAL usage
statistics consistent with Buffer usage statistics.

This commit also changed the usage of "full page writes" to
"full page images" for WAL usage statistics to make it consistent with
other parts of code and docs.

Author: Julien Rouhaud, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Kyotaro Horiguchi and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-05-05 08:00:53 +05:30
Michael Paquier 78bad97faa Improve various aspects of pg_rewind documentation
The pg_rewind docs currently assert that the state of the target's
data directory after rewind is equivalent to the source's data
directory.  This clarifies the documentation to describe that the base
state is further back in time and that the target's data directory will
include the current state from the source of any copied blocks since the
point of divergence.

This commit also improves the section "How It Works":
- Describe the update of the pg_control file.
- Reorganize the list of files and directories ignored during the
rewind.

Author: James Coleman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAaqYe-sgqCos7MXF4XiY8rUPy3CEmaCY9EvfhX-DhPhPBF5_A@mail.gmail.com
2020-05-01 17:40:41 +09:00
Tom Lane 5ac2475548 Doc: render &pi; more nicely in PDF output.
We need to select symbol font explicitly, or it comes out misaligned.

Alexander Lakhin, Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/10598.1587928415@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-04-27 11:00:28 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 8803506c41
Document partitiong tables ancillary object handling some more
Add a couple of lines to make it explicit that indexes, constraints,
triggers are added, removed, or left alone.

Backpatch to pg11.

Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200421162038.GA18628@alvherre.pgsql
2020-04-21 17:14:18 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera afccd76f1c
Fix detaching partitions with cloned row triggers
When a partition is detached, any triggers that had been cloned from its
parent were not properly disentangled from its parent triggers.
This resulted in triggers that could not be dropped because they
depended on the trigger in the trigger in the no-longer-parent table:
  ALTER TABLE t DETACH PARTITION t1;
  DROP TRIGGER trig ON t1;
    ERROR:  cannot drop trigger trig on table t1 because trigger trig on table t requires it
    HINT:  You can drop trigger trig on table t instead.

Moreover the table can no longer be re-attached to its parent, because
the trigger name is already taken:
  ALTER TABLE t ATTACH PARTITION t1 FOR VALUES FROM (1)TO(2);
    ERROR:  trigger "trig" for relation "t1" already exists

The former is a bug introduced in commit 86f575948c.  (The latter is
not necessarily a bug, but it makes the bug more uncomfortable.)

To avoid the complexity that would be needed to tell whether the trigger
has a local definition that has to be merged with the one coming from
the parent table, establish the behavior that the trigger is removed
when the table is detached.

Backpatch to pg11.

Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20200408152412.GZ2228@telsasoft.com
2020-04-21 13:57:00 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 5fc703946b
Add ALTER .. NO DEPENDS ON
Commit f2fcad27d5 (9.6 era) added the ability to mark objects as
dependent an extension, but forgot to add a way for such dependencies to
be removed.  This commit fixes that oversight.

Strictly speaking this should be backpatched to 9.6, but due to lack of
demand we're not doing so at this time.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200217225333.GA30974@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: ahsan hadi <ahsan.hadi@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed <ibrar.ahmad@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
2020-04-20 13:42:12 -04:00
Amit Kapila 24d2d38b1e Fix the usage of parallel and full options of vacuum command.
Earlier we were inconsistent in allowing the usage of parallel and
full options.  Change it such that we disallow them only when they are
combined in a way that we don't support.

In passing, improve the comments in some of the existing tests of parallel
vacuum.

Reported-by: Tushar Ahuja
Author: Justin Pryzby, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Michael Paquier, Mahendra Singh Thalor and
Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/58c8d171-e665-6fa3-a9d3-d9423b694dae%40enterprisedb.com
2020-04-16 10:55:02 +05:30
Michael Paquier 8128b0c152 Fix collection of typos and grammar mistakes in the tree, volume 2
This fixes some comments and documentation new as of Postgres 13, and is
a follow-up of the work done in dd0f37e.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200408165653.GF2228@telsasoft.com
2020-04-14 14:45:43 +09:00
Amit Kapila a6fea120a7 Comments and doc fixes for commit 40d964ec99.
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby
Author: Justin Pryzby, with few changes by me
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila and Sawada Masahiko
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200322021801.GB2563@telsasoft.com
2020-04-14 08:10:27 +05:30
Robert Haas 7a6b017b34 Rename pg_validatebackup to pg_verifybackup some more.
The previous commit missed an instance.

Noriyoshi Shinoda

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/TU4PR8401MB115291AE850BA7CF1AEB2F0BEEDD0@TU4PR8401MB1152.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
2020-04-13 10:51:40 -04:00
Amit Kapila ef08ca113f Cosmetic fixups for WAL usage work.
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby and Euler Taveira
Author: Justin Pryzby and Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-13 15:31:16 +05:30
Robert Haas dbc60c5593 Rename pg_validatebackup to pg_verifybackup.
Also, use "verify" rather than "validate" to refer to the process
being undertaken here. Per discussion, that is a more appropriate
term.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/172c9d9b-1d0a-1b94-1456-376b1e017322@2ndquadrant.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobLgMh6p8FmLbj_rv9Uhd7tPrLnAyLgGd2SoSj=qD-bVg@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-12 11:26:05 -04:00
Tom Lane f333d35428 Doc: clarify locking requirements for ALTER TABLE ADD FOREIGN KEY.
The docs explained that a SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE lock is needed on the
referenced table, but failed to say the same about the table being
altered.  Since the page says that ACCESS EXCLUSIVE lock is taken
unless otherwise stated, this left readers with the wrong conclusion.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/834603375.3470346.1586482852542@mail.yahoo.com
2020-04-10 13:12:58 -04:00
Tom Lane 7c91e9055d Doc: sync CREATE GROUP syntax synopsis with CREATE ROLE.
CREATE GROUP is an exact alias for CREATE ROLE, and CREATE USER is
almost an exact alias, as can easily be confirmed by checking the
code.  So the man page syntax descriptions ought to match up.  The
last few additions of role options seem to have forgotten to update
create_group.sgml, though.  Fix that, and add a naggy reminder to
create_role.sgml in hopes of not forgetting again.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/158647836143.655.9853963229391401576@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2020-04-10 10:44:09 -04:00
Michael Paquier dd0f37ecce Fix collection of typos and grammar mistakes in the tree
This fixes some comments and documentation new as of Postgres 13.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200408165653.GF2228@telsasoft.com
2020-04-10 11:18:39 +09:00
Fujii Masao c4f82a779d Fix typo in pg_validatebackup documentation.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/78f76a3d-1a28-a97d-0394-5c96985dd1c0@oss.nttdata.com
2020-04-09 22:38:24 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 83fd4532a7 Allow publishing partition changes via ancestors
To control whether partition changes are replicated using their own
identity and schema or an ancestor's, add a new parameter that can be
set per publication named 'publish_via_partition_root'.

This allows replicating a partitioned table into a different partition
structure on the subscriber.

Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-08 11:19:23 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov 1aac32df89 Revert 0f5ca02f53
0f5ca02f53 introduces 3 new keywords.  It appears to be too much for relatively
small feature.  Given now we past feature freeze, it's already late for
discussion of the new syntax.  So, revert.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28209.1586294824%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-04-08 11:37:27 +03:00
Tom Lane b63c293bcb Allow psql's \g and \gx commands to transiently change \pset options.
We invented \gx to allow the "\pset expanded" flag to be forced on
for the duration of one command output, but that turns out to not
be nearly enough to satisfy the demand for variant output formats.
Hence, make it possible to change any pset option(s) for the duration
of a single command output, by writing "option=value ..." inside
parentheses, for example
	\g (format=csv csv_fieldsep='\t') somefile

\gx can now be understood as a shorthand for including expanded=on
inside the parentheses.

Patch by me, expanding on a proposal by Pavel Stehule

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRBx9OnBPRJVtfA5ycUpySge-XootAXAsv_4rrkHxJ8eRg@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-07 17:46:29 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov 0f5ca02f53 Implement waiting for given lsn at transaction start
This commit adds following optional clause to BEGIN and START TRANSACTION
commands.

  WAIT FOR LSN lsn [ TIMEOUT timeout ]

New clause pospones transaction start till given lsn is applied on standby.
This clause allows user be sure, that changes previously made on primary would
be visible on standby.

New shared memory struct is used to track awaited lsn per backend.  Recovery
process wakes up backend once required lsn is applied.

Author: Ivan Kartyshov, Anna Akenteva
Reviewed-by: Craig Ringer, Thomas Munro, Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Ants Aasma, Dmitry Ivanov, Simon Riggs
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0240c26c-9f84-30ea-fca9-93ab2df5f305%40postgrespro.ru
2020-04-07 23:51:10 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera 357889eb17
Support FETCH FIRST WITH TIES
WITH TIES is an option to the FETCH FIRST N ROWS clause (the SQL
standard's spelling of LIMIT), where you additionally get rows that
compare equal to the last of those N rows by the columns in the
mandatory ORDER BY clause.

There was a proposal by Andrew Gierth to implement this functionality in
a more powerful way that would yield more features, but the other patch
had not been finished at this time, so we decided to use this one for
now in the spirit of incremental development.

Author: Surafel Temesgen <surafel3000@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q9ky7rD_A4vf=FVQvCGngm3LOes-ky0J6euMrg=_Se+ag@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87o8wvz253.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
2020-04-07 16:22:13 -04:00
Amit Kapila 33e05f89c5 Add the option to report WAL usage in EXPLAIN and auto_explain.
This commit adds a new option WAL similar to existing option BUFFERS in the
EXPLAIN command.  This option allows to include information on WAL record
generation added by commit df3b181499 in EXPLAIN output.

This also allows the WAL usage information to be displayed via
the auto_explain module.  A new parameter auto_explain.log_wal controls
whether WAL usage statistics are printed when an execution plan is logged.
This parameter has no effect unless auto_explain.log_analyze is enabled.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-06 08:02:15 +05:30
Robert Haas 0d8c9c1210 Generate backup manifests for base backups, and validate them.
A manifest is a JSON document which includes (1) the file name, size,
last modification time, and an optional checksum for each file backed
up, (2) timelines and LSNs for whatever WAL will need to be replayed
to make the backup consistent, and (3) a checksum for the manifest
itself. By default, we use CRC-32C when checksumming data files,
because we are trying to detect corruption and user error, not foil an
adversary. However, pg_basebackup and the server-side BASE_BACKUP
command now have options to select a different algorithm, so users
wanting a cryptographic hash function can select SHA-224, SHA-256,
SHA-384, or SHA-512. Users not wanting file checksums at all can
disable them, or disable generating of the backup manifest altogether.
Using a cryptographic hash function in place of CRC-32C consumes
significantly more CPU cycles, which may slow down backups in some
cases.

A new tool called pg_validatebackup can validate a backup against the
manifest. If no checksums are present, it can still check that the
right files exist and that they have the expected sizes. If checksums
are present, it can also verify that each file has the expected
checksum. Additionally, it calls pg_waldump to verify that the
expected WAL files are present and parseable. Only plain format
backups can be validated directly, but tar format backups can be
validated after extracting them.

Robert Haas, with help, ideas, review, and testing from David Steele,
Stephen Frost, Andrew Dunstan, Rushabh Lathia, Suraj Kharage, Tushar
Ahuja, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Mark Dilger, Davinder Singh, Jeevan
Chalke, Amit Kapila, Andres Freund, and Noah Misch.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZV8dw1H2bzZ9xkKwdrk8+XYa+DC9H=F7heO2zna5T6qg@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-03 15:05:59 -04:00
Michael Paquier 9d8ef98800 Add support for \aset in pgbench
This option is similar to \gset, except that it is able to store all
results from combined SQL queries into separate variables.  If a query
returns multiple rows, the last result is stored and if a query returns
no rows, nothing is stored.

While on it, add a TAP test for \gset to check for a failure when a
query returns multiple rows.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081914200.2529@lancre
2020-04-03 11:45:15 +09:00
Robert Haas ac44367efb pg_waldump: Add a --quiet option.
The primary motivation for this change is that it will be used by the
upcoming patch to add backup manifests, but it also seems to have some
potential more general use.

Andres Freund and Robert Haas

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20200330020814.nspra4mvby42yoa4@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-04-02 20:25:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 580a446c21 doc: Update for Unix-domain sockets on Windows
Update the documentation to reflect that Unix-domain sockets are now
usable on Windows.
2020-04-02 08:01:30 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov 3eabc62312 Correct CREATE INDEX documentation for opclass parameters
Old versions of opclass parameters patch supported ability to specify DEFAULT
as the opclass name in CREATE INDEX command.  This ability was removed in the
final version, but 911e702077 still mentions that in the documentation.
2020-04-01 15:01:26 +03:00
Michael Paquier a7e8ece41c Add -c/--restore-target-wal to pg_rewind
pg_rewind needs to copy from the source cluster to the target cluster a
set of relation blocks changed from the previous checkpoint where WAL
forked up to the end of WAL on the target.  Building this list of
relation blocks requires a range of WAL segments that may not be present
anymore on the target's pg_wal, causing pg_rewind to fail.  It is
possible to work around this issue by copying manually the WAL segments
needed but this may lead to some extra and actually useless work.

This commit introduces a new option allowing pg_rewind to use a
restore_command while doing the rewind by grabbing the parameter value
of restore_command from the target cluster configuration.  This allows
the rewind operation to be more reliable, so as only the WAL segments
needed by the rewind are restored from the archives.

In order to be able to do that, a new routine is added to src/common/ to
allow frontend tools to restore files from archives using an
already-built restore command.  This version is more simple than the
backend equivalent as there is no need to handle the non-recovery case.

Author: Alexey Kondratov
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Alexander
Korotkov, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a3acff50-5a0d-9a2c-b3b2-ee36168955c1@postgrespro.ru
2020-04-01 10:57:03 +09:00
Bruce Momjian 33cd0e5ea6 doc: adjust UPDATE/DELETE's FROM/USING to match SELECT's FROM
Previously the syntax and wording were unclear.

Reported-by: Alexey Bashtanov

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/968d4724-8e58-788f-7c45-f7b1813824cc@imap.cc

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-03-31 16:31:44 -04:00
Magnus Hagander 087d3d0583 Fix assorted typos
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2020-03-31 16:00:06 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut de3bbfcc96 Fix INSERT OVERRIDING USER VALUE behavior
The original implementation disallowed using OVERRIDING USER VALUE on
identity columns defined as GENERATED ALWAYS, which is not per
standard.  So allow that now.

Expand documentation and tests around this.

Author: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAEZATCVrh2ufCwmzzM%3Dk_OfuLhTTPBJCdFkimst2kry4oHepuQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-31 08:50:39 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov 911e702077 Implement operator class parameters
PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have
much freedom in the semantics of indexing.  These index AMs are GiST, GIN,
SP-GiST and BRIN.  There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on
them and supported search strategies.  So, it's natural that opclasses may be
faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision.  This commit implements
opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to
index the particular dataset.

This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog.  Instead it uses
pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but
unused for index attributes.

In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we
implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions.  Options
are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression.  It's possible due to the
fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so
fn_expr is unused for them.

This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage.  We parametrize
signature length in GiST.  That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops,
gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and
gist_hstore_ops.  Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for
gist__int_ops.  However, the main future usage of this feature is expected
to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular
json parts.

Catversion is bumped.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me
Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 19:17:23 +03:00
David Rowley b07642dbcd Trigger autovacuum based on number of INSERTs
Traditionally autovacuum has only ever invoked a worker based on the
estimated number of dead tuples in a table and for anti-wraparound
purposes. For the latter, with certain classes of tables such as
insert-only tables, anti-wraparound vacuums could be the first vacuum that
the table ever receives. This could often lead to autovacuum workers being
busy for extended periods of time due to having to potentially freeze
every page in the table. This could be particularly bad for very large
tables. New clusters, or recently pg_restored clusters could suffer even
more as many large tables may have the same relfrozenxid, which could
result in large numbers of tables requiring an anti-wraparound vacuum all
at once.

Here we aim to reduce the work required by anti-wraparound and aggressive
vacuums in general, by triggering autovacuum when the table has received
enough INSERTs. This is controlled by adding two new GUCs and reloptions;
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_threshold and
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_scale_factor. These work exactly the same as the
existing scale factor and threshold controls, only base themselves off the
number of inserts since the last vacuum, rather than the number of dead
tuples. New controls were added rather than reusing the existing
controls, to allow these new vacuums to be tuned independently and perhaps
even completely disabled altogether, which can be done by setting
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_threshold to -1.

We make no attempt to skip index cleanup operations on these vacuums as
they may trigger for an insert-mostly table which continually doesn't have
enough dead tuples to trigger an autovacuum for the purpose of removing
those dead tuples. If we were to skip cleaning the indexes in this case,
then it is possible for the index(es) to become bloated over time.

There are additional benefits to triggering autovacuums based on inserts,
as tables which never contain enough dead tuples to trigger an autovacuum
are now more likely to receive a vacuum, which can mark more of the table
as "allvisible" and encourage the query planner to make use of Index Only
Scans.

Currently, we still obey vacuum_freeze_min_age when triggering these new
autovacuums based on INSERTs. For large insert-only tables, it may be
beneficial to lower the table's autovacuum_freeze_min_age so that tuples
are eligible to be frozen sooner. Here we've opted not to zero that for
these types of vacuums, since the table may just be insert-mostly and we
may otherwise freeze tuples that are still destined to be updated or
removed in the near future.

There was some debate to what exactly the new scale factor and threshold
should default to. For now, these are set to 0.2 and 1000, respectively.
There may be some motivation to adjust these before the release.

Author: Laurenz Albe, Darafei Praliaskouski
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Masahiko Sawada, Chris Travers, Andres Freund, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC8Q8t%2Bj36G_bLF%3D%2B0iMo6jGNWnLnWb1tujXuJr-%2Bx8ZCCTqoQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-28 19:20:12 +13:00
Alvaro Herrera 2f9eb31320
pg_dump: Allow dumping data of specific foreign servers
The new command-line switch --include-foreign-data=PATTERN lets the user
specify foreign servers from which to dump foreign table data.  This can
be refined by further inclusion/exclusion switches, so that the user has
full control over which tables to dump.

A limitation is that this doesn't work in combination with parallel
dumps, for implementation reasons.  This might be lifted in the future,
but requires shuffling some code around.

Author: Luis Carril <luis.carril@swarm64.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Surafel Temesgen <surafel3000@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndQuadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/LEJPR01MB0185483C0079D2F651B16231E7FC0@LEJPR01MB0185.DEUPRD01.PROD.OUTLOOK.DE
2020-03-25 13:19:31 -03:00
Fujii Masao 67e0adfb3f Report NULL as total backup size if it's not estimated.
Previously 0 was reported in pg_stat_progress_basebackup.total_backup
if the total backup size was not estimated. Per discussion, our consensus
is that NULL is better choise as the value in total_backup in that case.
So this commit makes pg_stat_progress_basebackup view report NULL
in total_backup column if the estimation is disabled.

Bump catversion.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Magnus Hagander, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevExnhOD89zBDuPvfAAh243RzNpwCPEWNLtMYpKHMB8gbAQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-24 10:43:41 +09:00
Tom Lane 980a70b976 Fix our getopt_long's behavior for a command line argument of just "-".
src/port/getopt_long.c failed on such an argument, always seeing it
as an unrecognized switch.  This is unhelpful; better is to treat such
an item as a non-switch argument.  That behavior is what we find in
GNU's getopt_long(); it's what src/port/getopt.c does; and it is
required by POSIX for getopt(), which getopt_long() ought to be
generally a superset of.  Moreover, it's expected by ecpg, which
intends an argument of "-" to mean "read from stdin".  So fix it.

Also add some documentation about ecpg's behavior in this area, since
that was miserably underdocumented.  I had to reverse-engineer it
from the code.

Per bug #16304 from James Gray.  Back-patch to all supported branches,
since this has been broken forever.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16304-c662b00a1322db7f@postgresql.org
2020-03-23 11:58:00 -04:00
Michael Paquier c81bd3b9a5 Doc: Fix type of some storage parameters in CREATE TABLE page
autovacuum_vacuum_scale_factor and autovacuum_analyze_scale_factor have
been documented as "float4", but "floating type" is used in this case
for GUCs and relation options in the documentation.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYFf_p9BpbjLccx3CA=eM1Hk2Te=ULY4iptGLUhL-JxCPA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-03-23 13:38:03 +09:00
Fujii Masao fab13dc50b Make pg_basebackup ask the server to estimate the total backup size, by default.
This commit changes pg_basebackup so that it specifies PROGRESS option in
BASE_BACKUP replication command whether --progress is specified or not.
This causes the server to estimate the total backup size and report it in
pg_stat_progress_basebackup.backup_total, by default. This is reasonable
default because the time required for the estimation would not be so large
in most cases.

Also this commit adds new option --no-estimate-size to pg_basebackup.
This option prevents the server from the estimation, and so is useful to
avoid such estimation time if it's too long.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander, Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEyDPPSjP7KRvfTXPdqOdY5aWNkqsB5aAXs3bco5ZwtGHg@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-19 17:09:00 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 487e9861d0
Enable BEFORE row-level triggers for partitioned tables
... with the limitation that the tuple must remain in the same
partition.

Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200227165158.GA2071@alvherre.pgsql
2020-03-18 18:58:05 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut a2b1faa0f2 Implement type regcollation
This will be helpful for a following commit and it's also just
generally useful, like the other reg* types.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro and Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0uEQCpfq_%2BLYFBdArCe4Ot98t1aR4eYiYTe%3DyavQygiQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-18 21:21:00 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 8408e3a557 doc: Update documentation about reg* types
Add missing index entries, add missing information on pg_upgrade man
page, order things alphabetical instead of (apparently) in the order
they were implemented, reduce repetitiveness a bit.
2020-03-18 14:54:29 +01:00
Fujii Masao 1558413432 Update the description of type of check_option reloption in docs.
Commit 773df883e8 changed the type of check_option reloption
from string to enum. But it forgot to update the description of
the type in the documentation.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYFvHF4n6yxF390YZgr4Q0Z0c2w0ihu=DLb8ipNOnNcqzQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-18 18:28:22 +09:00
Peter Geoghegan dbbb55385c Doc: Correct deduplicate_items varlistentry id.
Use a varlistentry id for the deduplicate_items storage parameter that
is derived from the name of the parameter itself.

This oversight happened because the storage parameter was renamed
relatively late during the development of the patch that became commit
0d861bbb.
2020-03-17 15:53:05 -07:00
Fujii Masao 28e0a103a8 Add the type information for index storage parameters to the documentation.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYFQebs4WT5eu3dK4qm_2PurZuvB++8nDvSBG0ebRWmbdg@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-17 16:06:59 +09:00
Thomas Munro fc34b0d9de Introduce a maintenance_io_concurrency setting.
Introduce a GUC and a tablespace option to control I/O prefetching, much
like effective_io_concurrency, but for work that is done on behalf of
many client sessions.

Use the new setting in heapam.c instead of the hard-coded formula
effective_io_concurrency + 10 introduced by commit 558a9165e0.  Go with
a default value of 10 for now, because it's a round number pretty close
to the value used for that existing case.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJUw08dPs_3EUcdO6M90GnjofPYrWp4YSLaBkgYwS-AqA%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-16 17:14:26 +13:00
Peter Eisentraut 340de72780 doc: Remove unused title ids
FOP issues warnings about them.  These aren't even used, so just
remove them.  For the ones that are actually used, we'll come up with
a different solution.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e29b580e-79ab-a371-5ea4-6946e4d3af0b%402ndQuadrant.com
2020-03-13 15:45:37 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 17b9e7f9fe Support adding partitioned tables to publication
When a partitioned table is added to a publication, changes of all of
its partitions (current or future) are published via that publication.

This change only affects which tables a publication considers as its
members.  The receiving side still sees the data coming from the
individual leaf partitions.  So existing restrictions that partition
hierarchies can only be replicated one-to-one are not changed by this.

Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-10 09:09:32 +01:00
Michael Paquier 5aaa584f81 Doc: fix some description of environment variables with frontend tools
This addresses a couple of issues in the documentation:
- Description of PG_COLOR was missing for some tools (pg_archivecleanup
and pg_test_fsync), while the other descriptions had grammar mistakes.
- pgbench supports more environment variables: PGUSER, PGHOST and
PGPORT.
- vacuumlo, oid2name and pgbench support coloring (HEAD only)

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Daniel Gustafsson, Juan José Santamaría
Flecha
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200304075418.GJ2593@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 12
2020-03-09 10:53:22 +09:00
Alexander Korotkov b0b5e20cd8 Show opclass and opfamily related information in psql
This commit provides psql commands for listing operator classes, operator
families and its contents in psql.  New commands will be useful for exploring
capabilities of both builtin opclasses/opfamilies as well as
opclasses/opfamilies defined in extensions.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1529675324.14193.5.camel%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Sergey Cherkashin, Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Alvaro Herrera, Arthur Zakirov
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Andres Freund
2020-03-08 13:33:16 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut 7e39b968f1 doc: Remove unused ids
Some reference pages contained id attributes on refname elements.
These were apparently copied around from ancient times, but they don't
serve a purpose.  FOP issues minor warnings about them.  So it's
easiest to just remove them.
2020-03-07 14:04:09 +01:00
Tom Lane fe30e7ebfa Allow ALTER TYPE to change some properties of a base type.
Specifically, this patch allows ALTER TYPE to:
* Change the default TOAST strategy for a toastable base type;
* Promote a non-toastable type to toastable;
* Add/remove binary I/O functions for a type;
* Add/remove typmod I/O functions for a type;
* Add/remove a custom ANALYZE statistics functions for a type.

The first of these can be done by the type's owner; all the others
require superuser privilege since misuse could cause problems.

The main motivation for this patch is to allow extensions to
upgrade the feature sets of their data types, so the set of
alterable properties is biased towards that use-case.  However
it's also true that changing some other properties would be
a lot harder, as they get baked into physical storage and/or
stored expressions that depend on the type.

Along the way, refactor GenerateTypeDependencies() to make it easier
to call, refactor DefineType's volatility checks so they can be shared
by AlterType, and teach typcache.c that it might have to reload data
from the type's pg_type row, a scenario it never handled before.
Also rearrange alter_type.sgml a bit for clarity (put the
composite-type operations together).

Tomas Vondra and Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200228004440.b23ein4qvmxnlpht@development
2020-03-06 12:19:29 -05:00
Tom Lane bb03010b9f Remove the "opaque" pseudo-type and associated compatibility hacks.
A long time ago, it was necessary to declare datatype I/O functions,
triggers, and language handler support functions in a very type-unsafe
way involving a single pseudo-type "opaque".  We got rid of those
conventions in 7.3, but there was still support in various places to
automatically convert such functions to the modern declaration style,
to be able to transparently re-load dumps from pre-7.3 servers.
It seems unnecessary to continue to support that anymore, so take out
the hacks; whereupon the "opaque" pseudo-type itself is no longer
needed and can be dropped.

This is part of a group of patches removing various server-side kluges
for transparently upgrading pre-8.0 dump files.  Since we've had few
complaints about dropping pg_dump's support for dumping from pre-8.0
servers (commit 64f3524e2), it seems okay to now remove these kluges.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4110.1583255415@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-03-05 15:48:56 -05:00
Fujii Masao e65497df8f Report progress of streaming base backup.
This commit adds pg_stat_progress_basebackup view that reports
the progress while an application like pg_basebackup is taking
a base backup. This uses the progress reporting infrastructure
added by c16dc1aca5, adding support for streaming base backup.

Bump catversion.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Amit Langote, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9ed8b801-8215-1f3d-62d7-65bff53f6e94@oss.nttdata.com
2020-03-03 12:03:43 +09:00
Peter Geoghegan e537aed61d Doc: Fix deduplicate_items index term.
Reported-By: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18f07ae8-7d89-537c-b0a9-54100a1b46da@oss.nttdata.com
2020-02-27 09:32:34 -08:00
Peter Geoghegan 0d861bbb70 Add deduplication to nbtree.
Deduplication reduces the storage overhead of duplicates in indexes that
use the standard nbtree index access method.  The deduplication process
is applied lazily, after the point where opportunistic deletion of
LP_DEAD-marked index tuples occurs.  Deduplication is only applied at
the point where a leaf page split would otherwise be required.  New
posting list tuples are formed by merging together existing duplicate
tuples.  The physical representation of the items on an nbtree leaf page
is made more space efficient by deduplication, but the logical contents
of the page are not changed.  Even unique indexes make use of
deduplication as a way of controlling bloat from duplicates whose TIDs
point to different versions of the same logical table row.

The lazy approach taken by nbtree has significant advantages over a GIN
style eager approach.  Most individual inserts of index tuples have
exactly the same overhead as before.  The extra overhead of
deduplication is amortized across insertions, just like the overhead of
page splits.  The key space of indexes works in the same way as it has
since commit dd299df8 (the commit that made heap TID a tiebreaker
column).

Testing has shown that nbtree deduplication can generally make indexes
with about 10 or 15 tuples for each distinct key value about 2.5X - 4X
smaller, even with single column integer indexes (e.g., an index on a
referencing column that accompanies a foreign key).  The final size of
single column nbtree indexes comes close to the final size of a similar
contrib/btree_gin index, at least in cases where GIN's posting list
compression isn't very effective.  This can significantly improve
transaction throughput, and significantly reduce the cost of vacuuming
indexes.

A new index storage parameter (deduplicate_items) controls the use of
deduplication.  The default setting is 'on', so all new B-Tree indexes
automatically use deduplication where possible.  This decision will be
reviewed at the end of the Postgres 13 beta period.

There is a regression of approximately 2% of transaction throughput with
synthetic workloads that consist of append-only inserts into a table
with several non-unique indexes, where all indexes have few or no
repeated values.  The underlying issue is that cycles are wasted on
unsuccessful attempts at deduplicating items in non-unique indexes.
There doesn't seem to be a way around it short of disabling
deduplication entirely.  Note that deduplication of items in unique
indexes is fairly well targeted in general, which avoids the problem
there (we can use a special heuristic to trigger deduplication passes in
unique indexes, since we're specifically targeting "version bloat").

Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC because xl_btree_vacuum changed.

No bump in BTREE_VERSION, since the representation of posting list
tuples works in a way that's backwards compatible with version 4 indexes
(i.e. indexes built on PostgreSQL 12).  However, users must still
REINDEX a pg_upgrade'd index to use deduplication, regardless of the
Postgres version they've upgraded from.  This is the only way to set the
new nbtree metapage flag indicating that deduplication is generally
safe.

Author: Anastasia Lubennikova, Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion:
    https://postgr.es/m/55E4051B.7020209@postgrespro.ru
    https://postgr.es/m/4ab6e2db-bcee-f4cf-0916-3a06e6ccbb55@postgrespro.ru
2020-02-26 13:05:30 -08:00
Peter Geoghegan 612a1ab767 Add equalimage B-Tree support functions.
Invent the concept of a B-Tree equalimage ("equality implies image
equality") support function, registered as support function 4.  This
indicates whether it is safe (or not safe) to apply optimizations that
assume that any two datums considered equal by an operator class's order
method must be interchangeable without any loss of semantic information.
This is static information about an operator class and a collation.

Register an equalimage routine for almost all of the existing B-Tree
opclasses.  We only need two trivial routines for all of the opclasses
that are included with the core distribution.  There is one routine for
opclasses that index non-collatable types (which returns 'true'
unconditionally), plus another routine for collatable types (which
returns 'true' when the collation is a deterministic collation).

This patch is infrastructure for an upcoming patch that adds B-Tree
deduplication.

Author: Peter Geoghegan, Anastasia Lubennikova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzn3Ee49Gmxb7V1VJ3-AC8fWn-Fr8pfWQebHe8rYRxt5OQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-02-26 11:28:25 -08:00
Tom Lane 70a7732007 Remove support for upgrading extensions from "unpackaged" state.
Andres Freund pointed out that allowing non-superusers to run
"CREATE EXTENSION ... FROM unpackaged" has security risks, since
the unpackaged-to-1.0 scripts don't try to verify that the existing
objects they're modifying are what they expect.  Just attaching such
objects to an extension doesn't seem too dangerous, but some of them
do more than that.

We could have resolved this, perhaps, by still requiring superuser
privilege to use the FROM option.  However, it's fair to ask just what
we're accomplishing by continuing to lug the unpackaged-to-1.0 scripts
forward.  None of them have received any real testing since 9.1 days,
so they may not even work anymore (even assuming that one could still
load the previous "loose" object definitions into a v13 database).
And an installation that's trying to go from pre-9.1 to v13 or later
in one jump is going to have worse compatibility problems than whether
there's a trivial way to convert their contrib modules into extension
style.

Hence, let's just drop both those scripts and the core-code support
for "CREATE EXTENSION ... FROM".

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200213233015.r6rnubcvl4egdh5r@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-02-19 16:59:14 -05:00
Tom Lane dce988145f Doc: fix old oversights in GRANT/REVOKE documentation.
The GRANTED BY clause in GRANT/REVOKE ROLE has been there since 2005
but was never documented.  I'm not sure now whether that was just an
oversight or was intentional (given the limited capability of the
option).  But seeing that pg_dumpall does emit code that uses this
option, it seems like not documenting it at all is a bad idea.

Also, when we upgraded the syntax to allow CURRENT_USER/SESSION_USER
as the privilege recipient, the role form of GRANT was incorrectly
not modified to show that, and REVOKE's docs weren't touched at all.

Although I'm not that excited about GRANTED BY, the other oversight
seems serious enough to justify a back-patch.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3070.1581526786@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-02-12 14:13:13 -05:00
Michael Paquier dcdbb5a5db Add %x to default PROMPT1 and PROMPT2 in psql
%d can be used to track if the current connection is in a transaction
block or not, and adding it by default to the prompt has the advantage
to not need a modification of .psqlrc, something not possible depending
on the environment.

This discussion has happened across various sources, and there was a
strong consensus in favor of this change.

Author: Vik Fearing
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/09502c40-cfe1-bb29-10f9-4b3fa7b2bbb2@2ndquadrant.com
2020-02-12 13:31:14 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut e49d5ebbae Document the pg_upgrade -j/--jobs option as taking an argument 2020-02-11 23:50:04 +01:00
Amit Kapila 77a00b809a doc: Spell checking
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby
Author: Justin Pryzby
Backpatch-through: 9.6
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200206021432.GA24549@telsasoft.com
2020-02-10 08:34:43 +05:30
Alvaro Herrera 9710d3d4a8 Fix TRUNCATE .. CASCADE on partitions
When running TRUNCATE CASCADE on a child of a partitioned table
referenced by another partitioned table, the truncate was not applied to
partitions of the referencing table; this could leave rows violating the
constraint in the referencing partitioned table.  Repair by walking the
pg_constraint chain all the way up to the topmost referencing table.

Note: any partitioned tables containing FKs that reference other
partitioned tables should be checked for possible violating rows, if
TRUNCATE has occurred in partitions of the referenced table.

Reported-by: Christophe Courtois
Author: Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200204183906.115f693e@firost
2020-02-07 17:09:36 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera 75cdf24ec3 ALTER SUBSCRIPTION / REFRESH docs: explain copy_data
The docs are ambiguous as to which tables would be copied over when the
copy_data parameter is true in ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... REFRESH PUBLICATION.
Make it clear that it only applies to tables which are new in the
publication.

Author: David Christensen (reword by Álvaro Herrera)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/95339420-7F09-4F8C-ACC0-8F1CFAAD9CD7@endpoint.com
2020-02-05 15:05:14 -03:00
Tom Lane 50fc694e43 Invent "trusted" extensions, and remove the pg_pltemplate catalog.
This patch creates a new extension property, "trusted".  An extension
that's marked that way in its control file can be installed by a
non-superuser who has the CREATE privilege on the current database,
even if the extension contains objects that normally would have to be
created by a superuser.  The objects within the extension will (by
default) be owned by the bootstrap superuser, but the extension itself
will be owned by the calling user.  This allows replicating the old
behavior around trusted procedural languages, without all the
special-case logic in CREATE LANGUAGE.  We have, however, chosen to
loosen the rules slightly: formerly, only a database owner could take
advantage of the special case that allowed installation of a trusted
language, but now anyone who has CREATE privilege can do so.

Having done that, we can delete the pg_pltemplate catalog, moving the
knowledge it contained into the extension script files for the various
PLs.  This ends up being no change at all for the in-core PLs, but it is
a large step forward for external PLs: they can now have the same ease
of installation as core PLs do.  The old "trusted PL" behavior was only
available to PLs that had entries in pg_pltemplate, but now any
extension can be marked trusted if appropriate.

This also removes one of the stumbling blocks for our Python 2 -> 3
migration, since the association of "plpythonu" with Python 2 is no
longer hard-wired into pg_pltemplate's initial contents.  Exactly where
we go from here on that front remains to be settled, but one problem
is fixed.

Patch by me, reviewed by Peter Eisentraut, Stephen Frost, and others.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5889.1566415762@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-01-29 18:42:43 -05:00
Amit Kapila 47bc9ced0d Add --parallel option to vacuumdb command.
Commit 40d964ec99 allowed vacuum command to leverage multiple CPUs by
invoking parallel workers to process indexes.  This commit provides a
'--parallel' option to specify the parallel degree used by vacuum command.

Author: Masahiko Sawada, with few modifications by me
Reviewed-by: Mahendra Singh and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.com
2020-01-29 11:08:50 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut a7a848844d Fix typo 2020-01-24 12:18:07 +01:00
Michael Paquier 6de7bcb76f Doc: Fix list of storage parameters available for ALTER TABLE
Only the parameter parallel_workers can be used directly with ALTER
TABLE.

Issue introduced in 6f3a13f, so backpatch down to 10.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200106025623.GA12066@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 10
2020-01-24 09:55:21 +09:00
Michael Paquier a904abe2e2 Fix concurrent indexing operations with temporary tables
Attempting to use CREATE INDEX, DROP INDEX or REINDEX with CONCURRENTLY
on a temporary relation with ON COMMIT actions triggered unexpected
errors because those operations use multiple transactions internally to
complete their work.  Here is for example one confusing error when using
ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS:
ERROR:  index "foo" already contains data

Issues related to temporary relations and concurrent indexing are fixed
in this commit by enforcing the non-concurrent path to be taken for
temporary relations even if using CONCURRENTLY, transparently to the
user.  Using a non-concurrent path does not matter in practice as locks
cannot be taken on a temporary relation by a session different than the
one owning the relation, and the non-concurrent operation is more
effective.

The problem exists with REINDEX since v12 with the introduction of
CONCURRENTLY, and with CREATE/DROP INDEX since CONCURRENTLY exists for
those commands.  In all supported versions, this caused only confusing
error messages to be generated.  Note that with REINDEX, it was also
possible to issue a REINDEX CONCURRENTLY for a temporary relation owned
by a different session, leading to a server crash.

The idea to enforce transparently the non-concurrent code path for
temporary relations comes originally from Andres Freund.

Reported-by: Manuel Rigger
Author: Michael Paquier, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+u7OA6gP7YAeCguyseusYcc=uR8+ypjCcgDDCTzjQ+k6S9ksQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2020-01-22 09:49:18 +09:00
Tom Lane 9b9c5f279e Clarify behavior of adding and altering a column in same ALTER command.
The behavior of something like

ALTER TABLE transactions
  ADD COLUMN status varchar(30) DEFAULT 'old',
  ALTER COLUMN status SET default 'current';

is to fill existing table rows with 'old', not 'current'.  That's
intentional and desirable for a couple of reasons:

* It makes the behavior the same whether you merge the sub-commands
into one ALTER command or give them separately;

* If we applied the new default while filling the table, there would
be no way to get the existing behavior in one SQL command.

The same reasoning applies in cases that add a column and then
manipulate its GENERATED/IDENTITY status in a second sub-command,
since the generation expression is really just a kind of default.
However, that wasn't very obvious (at least not to me; earlier in
the referenced discussion thread I'd thought it was a bug to be
fixed).  And it certainly wasn't documented.

Hence, add documentation, code comments, and a test case to clarify
that this behavior is all intentional.

In passing, adjust ATExecAddColumn's defaults-related relkind check
so that it matches up exactly with ATRewriteTables, instead of being
effectively (though not literally) the negated inverse condition.
The reasoning can be explained a lot more concisely that way, too
(not to mention that the comment now matches the code, which it
did not before).

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/10365.1558909428@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-01-21 16:17:21 -05:00
Amit Kapila 40d964ec99 Allow vacuum command to process indexes in parallel.
This feature allows the vacuum to leverage multiple CPUs in order to
process indexes.  This enables us to perform index vacuuming and index
cleanup with background workers.  This adds a PARALLEL option to VACUUM
command where the user can specify the number of workers that can be used
to perform the command which is limited by the number of indexes on a
table.  Specifying zero as a number of workers will disable parallelism.
This option can't be used with the FULL option.

Each index is processed by at most one vacuum process.  Therefore parallel
vacuum can be used when the table has at least two indexes.

The parallel degree is either specified by the user or determined based on
the number of indexes that the table has, and further limited by
max_parallel_maintenance_workers.  The index can participate in parallel
vacuum iff it's size is greater than min_parallel_index_scan_size.

Author: Masahiko Sawada and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila, Robert Haas, Tomas Vondra,
Mahendra Singh and Sergei Kornilov
Tested-by: Mahendra Singh and Prabhat Sahu
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.com
https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1J-VoR9gzS5E75pcD-OH0mEyCdp8RihcwKrcuw7J-Q0+w@mail.gmail.com
2020-01-20 07:57:49 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut f595117e24 ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... DROP EXPRESSION
Add an ALTER TABLE subcommand for dropping the generated property from
a column, per SQL standard.

Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/2f7f1d9c-946e-0453-d841-4f38eb9d69b6%402ndquadrant.com
2020-01-14 13:36:03 +01:00
Michael Paquier 00b047fa67 doc: Fix naming of SELinux
Reported-by: Tham Nguyen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157851402876.29175.12977878383183540468@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2020-01-10 09:36:55 +09:00
Fujii Masao 1ab029d528 Add note about how each partition's default value is treated, into the doc.
Column defaults may be specified separately for each partition.
But INSERT via a partitioned table ignores those partition's default values.
The former is documented, but the latter restriction not.
This commit adds the note about that restriction into the document.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwEs-59omrfGF7hOHz9iMME3RbKy5ny+iftDx3LHTEn9sA@mail.gmail.com
2019-12-26 15:07:43 +09:00
Bruce Momjian 4cab43ec80 docs: clarify handling of column lists in COPY TO/FROM
Previously it was unclear how COPY FROM handled cases where not all
columns were specified, or if the order didn't match.

Reported-by: pavlo.golub@gmail.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157487729344.7213.14245726713444755296@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-12-21 12:44:38 -05:00
Michael Paquier 52dcfda487 Doc: Improve readability of options for REINDEX
That's more consistent with the style we have been using with for
example EXPLAIN, VACUUM or ANALYZE (this one had only one option in
v11).  Based on a suggestion from Pavel Stehule.

Author: Josef Šimánek
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRCrUS+eMFvssVPGZN-VDEMP3XN+1Dop0=CmeBq2D+dqOg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFp7QwpeMPEtAR5AYpsG623ooMWX03wMjq5cpZn=X+6OCkfwJw@mail.gmail.com
2019-12-18 11:07:36 +09:00
Tom Lane d3aa114ac4 Doc: improve discussion of race conditions involved in LISTEN.
The user docs didn't really explain how to use LISTEN safely,
so clarify that.  Also clean up some fuzzy-headed explanations
in comments.  No code changes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3ac7f397-4d5f-be8e-f354-440020675694@gmail.com
2019-11-24 18:03:39 -05:00
Thomas Munro 1974853d89 doc: Fix whitespace in syntax.
Back-patch to 10.

Author: Andreas Karlsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/043acae2-a369-b7fa-be48-1933aa2e82d1%40proxel.se
2019-11-25 09:23:10 +13:00
Tom Lane d1c866e57f Make psql redisplay the query buffer after \e.
Up to now, whatever you'd edited was put back into the query buffer
but not redisplayed, which is less than user-friendly.  But we can
improve that just by printing the text along with a prompt, if we
enforce that the editing result ends with a newline (which it
typically would anyway).  You then continue typing more lines if
you want, or you can type ";" or do \g or \r or another \e.

This is intentionally divorced from readline's processing,
for simplicity and so that it works the same with or without
readline enabled.  We discussed possibly integrating things
more closely with readline; but that seems difficult, uncertainly
portable across different readline and libedit versions, and
of limited real benefit anyway.  Let's try the simple way and
see if it's good enough.

Patch by me, thanks to Fabien Coelho and Laurenz Albe for review

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/13192.1572318028@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-11-22 17:07:54 -05:00
Fujii Masao 30840c92ac Allow ALTER VIEW command to rename the column in the view.
ALTER TABLE RENAME COLUMN command always can be used to rename the column
in the view, but it's reasonable to add that syntax to ALTER VIEW too.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed, Yu Kimura
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHoQMD3b-MqTLcp1MgdhCpOKU7QNRwjFooT4_d+ti5v6g@mail.gmail.com
2019-11-21 19:55:13 +09:00
Amit Kapila 80e05a088e Add the support for '-f' option in dropdb utility.
Specifying '-f' will add the 'force' option to the DROP DATABASE command
sent to the server.  This will try to terminate all existing connections
to the target database before dropping it.

Author: Pavel Stehule
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmLJJbn70vLOZFpxGw3XD7nLB_7+NKz46H5EOO2k5H7OQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-11-20 08:25:07 +05:30
Tom Lane 5b805886ca Doc: clarify use of RECURSIVE in WITH.
Apparently some people misinterpreted the syntax as being that
RECURSIVE is a prefix of individual WITH queries.  It's a modifier
for the WITH clause as a whole, so state that more clearly.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ca53c6ce-a0c6-b14a-a8e3-162f0b2cc119@a-kretschmer.de
2019-11-19 14:43:37 -05:00
Tom Lane 787b3fd33f Doc: clarify behavior of ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES ... IN SCHEMA.
The existing text stated that "Default privileges that are specified
per-schema are added to whatever the global default privileges are for
the particular object type".  However, that bare-bones observation is
not quite clear enough, as demonstrated by the complaint in bug #16124.
Flesh it out by stating explicitly that you can't revoke built-in
default privileges this way, and by providing an example to drive
the point home.

Back-patch to all supported branches, since it's been like this
from the beginning.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16124-423d8ee4358421bc@postgresql.org
2019-11-19 14:21:41 -05:00
Thomas Munro 7f338369ca Allow invisible PROMPT2 in psql.
Keep track of the visible width of PROMPT1, and provide %w as a way
for PROMPT2 to generate the same number of spaces.

Author: Thomas Munro, with ideas from others
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BzGd7RigjWbxwhzGW59gUpf76ydQECeGdEdodH6nd__A%40mail.gmail.com
2019-11-19 15:56:21 +13:00
Alvaro Herrera 6ae4d27187 Remove the word "virgins" for documentation
Apparently, it's no longer welcome.  Therefore replace it with "pristine",
and add some explanatory text while at it.

Reported by Brian Williams
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157313712259.14261.16141263269989647311@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2019-11-14 17:33:26 -03:00
Amit Kapila 1379fd537f Introduce the 'force' option for the Drop Database command.
This new option terminates the other sessions connected to the target
database and then drop it.  To terminate other sessions, the current user
must have desired permissions (same as pg_terminate_backend()).  We don't
allow to terminate the sessions if prepared transactions, active logical
replication slots or subscriptions are present in the target database.

Author: Pavel Stehule with changes by me
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Ibrar Ahmed, Anthony Nowocien,
Ryan Lambert and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmLJJbn70vLOZFpxGw3XD7nLB_7+NKz46H5EOO2k5H7OQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-11-13 08:25:33 +05:30
Fujii Masao a386942bd2 Add "G" (server-side data generation) as an initialization step in pgbench.
This commit allows --init-steps option in pgbench to accept "G" character
meaning server-side data generation as an initialization step.
With "G", only limited queries are sent from pgbench client and
then data is actually generated in the server. This might make
the initialization phase faster if the bandwidth between pgbench client
and the server is low.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Anna Endo, Ibrar Ahmed, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904061826420.3678@lancre
2019-11-06 11:02:30 +09:00
Michael Paquier 2a4d96ebbd Doc: Clarify locks taken when using ALTER TABLE ATTACH PARTITION
Since 898e5e32, this command uses partially ShareUpdateExclusiveLock,
but the docs did not get the call.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191028001207.GB23808@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-11-05 10:32:38 +09:00
Michael Paquier ea88133801 Doc: Improve description around ALTER TABLE ATTACH PARTITION
This clarifies more how to use and how to take advantage of constraints
when attaching a new partition.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191028001207.GB23808@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 10
2019-11-05 10:17:33 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut cbe63d02d0 doc: Use proper em and en dashes 2019-10-25 20:39:41 +02:00
Bruce Momjian 59c2617af3 docs: fix wording of REFRESH CONCURRENTLY manual page
Reported-by: Asim / apraveen@pivotal.io

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157076828181.26165.15231292023740913543@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-10-23 20:29:02 -04:00
Thomas Munro d5ac14f9cc Use libc version as a collation version on glibc systems.
Using glibc's version string to detect potential collation definition
changes is not 100% reliable, but it's better than nothing.  Currently
this affects only collations explicitly provided by "libc".  More work
will be needed to handle the default collation.

Author: Thomas Munro, based on a suggestion from Christoph Berg
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4b76c6d4-ae5e-0dc6-7d0d-b5c796a07e34%402ndquadrant.com
2019-10-16 17:28:24 +13:00
Michael Paquier 4351142e58 Doc: Fix various inconsistencies
This fixes multiple areas of the documentation:
- COPY for its past compatibility section.
- SET ROLE mentioning INHERITS instead of INHERIT
- PREPARE referring to stmt_name, that is not present.
- Extension documentation about format name with upgrade scripts.

Backpatch down to 9.4 for the relevant parts.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bf95233a-9943-b341-e2ff-a860c28af481@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-10-16 13:09:52 +09:00
Michael Paquier caa078353e Improve handling and coverage of --no-ensure-shutdown in pg_rewind
This includes a couple of changes around the new behavior of pg_rewind
which enforces recovery to happen once on a cluster not shut down
cleanly:
- Some comments and documentation improvements.
- Shutdown the cluster to rewind with immediate mode in all the tests,
this allows to check after the forced recovery behavior which is wanted
as new default.
- Use -F for the forced recovery step, so as postgres does not use
fsync.  This was useless as a final sync is done once the tool is done.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191004083721.GA1829@paquier.xyz
2019-10-07 09:07:22 +09:00
Amit Kapila b1c1aa5318 pgbench: add --partitions and --partition-method options.
These new options allow users to partition the pgbench_accounts table by
specifying the number of partitions and partitioning method.  The values
allowed for partitioning method are range and hash.

This feature allows users to measure the overhead of partitioning if any.

Author: Fabien COELHO
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Amit Langote, Dilip Kumar, Asif Rehman, and
Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1907230826190.7008@lancre
2019-10-03 08:27:07 +05:30
Tom Lane ce734aaec1 Doc: improve PREPARE documentation, cross-referencing to plan_cache_mode.
The behavior described in the PREPARE man page applies only for the
default plan_cache_mode setting, so explain that properly.  Rewrite
some of the text while I'm here.  Per suggestion from Bruce.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190930155505.GA21095@momjian.us
2019-09-30 14:31:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 7e0fb165dd docs: adjust multi-column most-common-value statistics
This commit adds a mention that the order of columns specified during
multi-column most-common-value statistics is insignificant, and tries to
simplify examples.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190828162238.GA8360@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 12
2019-09-30 13:44:22 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 927474ce1a pg_rewind: Allow writing recovery configuration
This is provided with a new switch --write-recovery-conf and reuses the
pg_basebackup code.

Author: Paul Guo, Jimmy Yih, Ashwin Agrawal
Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov, Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEET0ZEffUkXc48pg2iqARQgGRYDiiVxDu+yYek_bTwJF+q=Uw@mail.gmail.com
2019-09-30 12:57:35 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut 92f1545d6e doc: Add a link target
Forward-patched from PostgreSQL 12 release notes patch, for
consistency.
2019-09-29 09:51:43 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera 5adafaf176 Have pg_rewind run crash recovery before rewinding
If we don't do this, the rewind fails if the server wasn't cleanly shut
down, which seems unhelpful serving no purpose.

Also provide a new option --no-ensure-shutdown to suppress this
behavior, for alleged advanced usage that prefers to avoid the crash
recovery.

Authors: Paul Guo, Jimmy Yih, Ashwin Agrawal
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEET0ZEffUkXc48pg2iqARQgGRYDiiVxDu+yYek_bTwJF+q=Uw@mail.gmail.com
2019-09-27 16:40:01 -03:00
Amit Kapila 70377cf4c6 Fix typo in commit 578b229718.
Reported-by: Filip Rembiałkowski
Author: Filip Rembiałkowski
Backpatch-through: 12, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmSNy1=_82rwGe3-X4PjWqPSFXtzNf43DCtGzD7SazdXA@mail.gmail.com
2019-09-19 14:40:09 +05:30
Tomas Vondra d06215d03b Allow setting statistics target for extended statistics
When building statistics, we need to decide how many rows to sample and
how accurate the resulting statistics should be. Until now, it was not
possible to explicitly define statistics target for extended statistics
objects, the value was always computed from the per-attribute targets
with a fallback to the system-wide default statistics target.

That's a bit inconvenient, as it ties together the statistics target set
for per-column and extended statistics. In some cases it may be useful
to require larger sample / higher accuracy for extended statics (or the
other way around), but with this approach that's not possible.

So this commit introduces a new command, allowing to specify statistics
target for individual extended statistics objects, overriding the value
derived from per-attribute targets (and the system default).

  ALTER STATISTICS stat_name SET STATISTICS target_value;

When determining statistics target for an extended statistics object we
first look at this explicitly set value. When this value is -1, we fall
back to the old formula, looking at the per-attribute targets first and
then the system default. This means the behavior is backwards compatible
with older PostgreSQL releases.

Author: Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190618213357.vli3i23vpkset2xd@development
Reviewed-by: Kirk Jamison, Dean Rasheed
2019-09-11 00:25:51 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 862ef372d6 Fix behavior of AND CHAIN outside of explicit transaction blocks
When using COMMIT AND CHAIN or ROLLBACK AND CHAIN not in an explicit
transaction block, the previous implementation would leave a
transaction block active in the ROLLBACK case but not the COMMIT case.
To fix for now, error out when using these commands not in an explicit
transaction block.  This restriction could be lifted if a sensible
definition and implementation is found.

Bug: #15977
Author: fn ln <emuser20140816@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2019-09-08 16:23:03 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 8e929a4667 doc: Clean up title case use
Note: Following existing practice, titles of formalpara and step are
not titlecased.
2019-09-08 10:27:29 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 021da890bc doc: Fix awkward markup 2019-09-06 22:19:53 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 10f5544896 Clarify pg_dump documentation
Clarify in the help output and documentation that -n, -t etc. take a
"pattern" rather than a "schema" or "table" etc.  This was especially
confusing now that the new pg_dumpall --exclude-database option was
documented with "pattern" and the others not, even though they all
behave the same.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b85f3fa1-b350-38d1-1893-4f7911bd7310%402ndquadrant.com
2019-09-03 14:25:26 +02:00
Michael Paquier 0431a78746 Doc: Improve wording of multiple places in documentation
This has been found during its translation.

Author: Liudmila Mantrova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEkD-mDJHV3bhgezu3MUafJLoAKsOOT86+wHukKU8_NeiJYhLQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-08-20 12:36:31 +09:00
Tom Lane bb5ae8f6c4 Use a hash table to de-duplicate NOTIFY events faster.
Previously, async.c got rid of duplicate notifications by scanning
the list of pending events to compare each one to the proposed new
event.  This works okay for very small numbers of distinct events,
but degrades as O(N^2) for many events.  We can improve matters by
using a hash table to probe for duplicates.  So as not to add a
lot of overhead for the simple cases that the code did handle well
before, create the hash table only once a (sub)transaction has
queued more than 16 distinct notify events.

A downside is that we now have to do per-event work to propagate
a successful subtransaction's notify events up to its parent.
(But this isn't significant unless the subtransaction had many
events, in which case the O(N^2) behavior would have been in
play already, so we still come out ahead.)

We can make some lemonade out of this lemon, though: since we must
examine each event anyway, it's now possible to de-duplicate events
fully, rather than skipping that for events merged up from
subtransactions.  Hence, remove the old weasel wording in notify.sgml
about whether de-duplication happens or not, and adjust the test
case in async-notify.spec that exhibited the old behavior.

While at it, rearrange the definition of struct Notification to make
it more compact and require just one palloc per event, rather than
two or three.  This saves space when there are a lot of events,
in fact more than enough to buy back the space needed for the hash
table.

Patch by me, based on discussions around a different patch
submitted by Filip Rembiałkowski.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17822.1564186806@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-08-15 12:22:12 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 956451e8bc Clarify the default partition's role
Reviewed by Tom Lane and Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190806222735.GA9535@alvherre.pgsql
2019-08-08 16:05:59 -04:00
Tom Lane e94cd0a8eb Doc: document permissions required for ANALYZE.
VACUUM's reference page had this text, but ANALYZE's didn't.  That's
a clear oversight given that section 5.7 explicitly delegates the
responsibility to define permissions requirements to the individual
commands' man pages.

Per gripe from Isaac Morland.  Back-patch to all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsGm5fp3oBUs-2iRfii0iEO=fZuJALVyM2zJLhNTjG34gpAVQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-08-07 18:09:28 -04:00
Michael Paquier 8548ddc61b Fix inconsistencies and typos in the tree, take 9
This addresses more issues with code comments, variable names and
unreferenced variables.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7ab243e0-116d-3e44-d120-76b3df7abefd@gmail.com
2019-08-05 12:14:58 +09:00
Michael Paquier eb43f3d193 Fix inconsistencies and typos in the tree
This is numbered take 8, and addresses again a set of issues with code
comments, variable names and unreferenced variables.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b137b5eb-9c95-9c2f-586e-38aba7d59788@gmail.com
2019-07-29 12:28:30 +09:00
Michael Paquier 5ab892c391 Add support for --jobs in reindexdb
When doing a schema-level or a database-level operation, a list of
relations to build is created which gets processed in parallel using
multiple connections, based on the recent refactoring for parallel slots
in src/bin/scripts/.  System catalogs are processed first in a
serialized fashion to prevent deadlocks, followed by the rest done in
parallel.

This new option is not compatible with --system as reindexing system
catalogs in parallel can lead to deadlocks, and with --index as there is
no conflict handling for indexes rebuilt in parallel depending in the
same relation.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOBaU_YrnH_Jqo46NhaJ7uRBiWWEcS40VNRQxgFbqYo9kApUsg@mail.gmail.com
2019-07-27 22:21:18 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 4552c0f566 pg_upgrade: Update obsolescent documentation note
Recently released xfsprogs 5.1.0 has reflink support enabled by
default, so the note that it's not enabled by default can be removed.
2019-07-27 08:26:33 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 959f6d6a18 pg_upgrade: Default new bindir to pg_upgrade location
Make the directory where the pg_upgrade binary resides the default for
new bindir, as running the pg_upgrade binary from where the new
cluster is installed is a very common scenario.  Setting this as the
defauly bindir for the new cluster will remove the need to provide it
explicitly via -B in many cases.

To support directories being missing from option parsing, extend the
directory check with a missingOk mode where the path must be filled at
a later point before being used.  Also move the exec_path check to
earlier in setup to make sure we know the new cluster bindir when we
scan for required executables.

This removes the exec_path from the OSInfo struct as it is not used
anywhere.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9328.1552952117@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-07-27 08:19:04 +02:00
Michael Paquier fd7d387e05 Doc: Clarify interactions of pg_receivewal with remote_apply
Using pg_receivewal with synchronous_commit = remote_apply set in the
backend is incompatible if pg_receivewal is a synchronous standby as it
never applies WAL, so document this problem and solutions to it.

Backpatch to 9.6, where remote_apply has been added.

Author: Robert Haas, Jesper Pedersen
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1427a2d3-1e51-9335-1931-4f8853d90d5e@redhat.com
Backpatch-through: 9.6
2019-07-24 11:25:43 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 06140c201b Add CREATE DATABASE LOCALE option
This sets both LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE with one option.  Similar
behavior is already supported in initdb, CREATE COLLATION, and
createdb.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d9d5043a-dc70-da8a-0166-1e218e6e34d4%402ndquadrant.com
2019-07-23 14:47:24 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 7961886580 Revert "initdb: Change authentication defaults"
This reverts commit 09f08930f0.

The buildfarm client needs some adjustments first.
2019-07-22 19:28:25 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 09f08930f0 initdb: Change authentication defaults
Change the defaults for the pg_hba.conf generated by initdb to "peer"
for local (if supported, else "md5") and "md5" for host.

(Changing from "md5" to SCRAM is left as a separate exercise.)

"peer" is currently not supported on AIX, HP-UX, and Windows.  Users
on those operating systems will now either have to provide a password
to initdb or choose a different authentication method when running
initdb.

Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/bec17f0a-ddb1-8b95-5e69-368d9d0a3390%40postgresql.org
2019-07-22 15:14:27 +02:00
Michael Paquier 1c1602b8b6 Simplify description of --data-checksums in documentation of initdb
The documentation mentioned that data checksums cannot be changed after
initialization, which is not true as pg_checksums can do that with its
--enable option introduced in v12.  This simply removes the sentence
telling so.

Reported-by: Basil Bourque
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15909-e9d74271f1647472@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-07-18 10:05:59 +09:00
Thomas Munro 5823677acc Provide pgbench --show-script to dump built-in scripts.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081737390.5867%40lancre
2019-07-16 11:57:49 +12:00
Thomas Munro 0369f47366 Fix documentation for pgbench tpcb-like.
We choose a random value for delta, not balance.  Back-patch to 9.6 where
the mistake arrived.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081752210.5867@lancre
2019-07-14 14:22:57 +12:00
Michael Paquier 170d11b8e7 Fix and improve several places in the docs
This adds some missing markups, fixes a couple of incorrect ones and
clarifies some documentation in various places.

Author: Liudmila Mantrova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a068f947-7a51-5df1-b3fd-1a131ae5c044@postgrespro.ru
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-07-13 14:43:29 +09:00
Tom Lane 0ab1a2e39b Remove dead encoding-conversion functions.
The code for conversions SQL_ASCII <-> MULE_INTERNAL and
SQL_ASCII <-> UTF8 was unreachable, because we long ago changed
the wrapper functions pg_do_encoding_conversion() et al so that
they have hard-wired behaviors for conversions involving SQL_ASCII.
(At least some of those fast paths date back to 2002, though it
looks like we may not have been totally consistent about this until
later.)  Given the lack of complaints, nobody is dissatisfied with
this state of affairs.  Hence, let's just remove the unreachable code.

Also, change CREATE CONVERSION so that it rejects attempts to
define such conversions.  Since we consider that SQL_ASCII represents
lack of knowledge about the encoding in use, such a conversion would
be semantically dubious even if it were reachable.

Adjust a couple of regression test cases that had randomly decided
to rely on these conversion functions rather than any other ones.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/41163.1559156593@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-07-05 14:17:27 -04:00
Tom Lane 02e95a5049 Add \warn command to psql.
This is like \echo except that the text is sent to stderr not stdout.

In passing, fix a pre-existing bug in \echo and \qecho: per documentation
the -n switch should only be recognized when it is the first argument,
but actually any argument matching "-n" was treated as a switch.
(Should we back-patch that?)

David Fetter (bug fix by me), reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190421183115.GA4311@fetter.org
2019-07-05 12:32:36 -04:00
Tom Lane 03e7b302b1 Doc: document table persistence display in \dt+.
Forgotten in commit 9a2ea6183.
2019-07-03 12:18:10 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 55ed3defc9 Fix partitioned index creation with foreign partitions
When a partitioned tables contains foreign tables as partitions, it is
not possible to implement unique or primary key indexes -- but when
regular indexes are created, there is no reason to do anything other
than ignoring such partitions.  We were raising errors upon encountering
the foreign partitions, which is unfriendly and doesn't protect against
any actual problems.

Relax this restriction so that index creation is allowed on partitioned
tables containing foreign partitions, becoming a no-op on them.  (We may
later want to redefine this so that the FDW is told to create the
indexes on the foreign side.)  This applies to CREATE INDEX, as well as
ALTER TABLE / ATTACH PARTITION and CREATE TABLE / PARTITION OF.

Backpatch to 11, where indexes on partitioned tables were introduced.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15724-d5a58fa9472eef4f@postgresql.org
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
2019-06-26 18:38:51 -04:00
Michael Paquier ce59b75d44 Add toast-level reloption for vacuum_index_cleanup
a96c41f has introduced the option for heap, but it still lacked the
variant to control the behavior for toast relations.

While on it, refactor the tests so as they stress more scenarios with
the various values that vacuum_index_cleanup can use.  It would be
useful to couple those tests with pageinspect to check that pages are
actually cleaned up, but this is left for later.

Author: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoCqs8iN04RX=i1KtLSaX5RrTEM04b7NHYps4+rqtpWNEg@mail.gmail.com
2019-06-25 09:09:27 +09:00
Tomas Vondra 7f44efa10b Fix incorrect CREATE STATISTICS example in docs
The example was incorrectly using parantheses around the list of columns, so
just drop them.

Reported-By: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BTgmoZZEMAqWMAfvLHZnK57SoxOutgvE-ALO94WsRA7zZ7wyQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-06-16 01:20:42 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera a193cbec11 Add pg_dumpall --rows-per-insert
Commit 7e413a0f82 added that option to pg_dump, but neglected to teach
pg_dumpall how to pass it along.  Repair.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/45f50c59-ddbb-8cf2-eedb-81003f603528@2ndquadrant.com
2019-06-14 18:21:52 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 313f56ce2d Tweak libpq's PQhost, PQhostaddr, and psql's \connect
Fixes some problems introduced by 6e5f8d489acc:

* When reusing conninfo data from the previous connection in \connect,
  the host address should only be reused if it was specified as
  hostaddr; if it wasn't, then 'host' is resolved afresh.  We were
  reusing the same IP address, which ignores a possible DNS change
  as well as any other addresses that the name resolves to than the
  one that was used in the original connection.

* PQhost, PQhostaddr: Don't present user-specified hostaddr when we have
  an inet_net_ntop-produced equivalent address.  The latter has been
  put in canonical format, which is cleaner (so it produces "127.0.0.1"
  when given "host=2130706433", for example).

* Document the hostaddr-reusing aspect of \connect.

* Fix some code comments

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reported-by: Noah Misch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190527203713.GA58392@gust.leadboat.com
2019-06-14 18:02:26 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 9f05c44ba4 Fix order of steps in DISCARD ALL documentation
The docs have always been slightly inaccurate, but got particularly so
in a874fe7b4c, which made DISCARD ALL occur before everything else;
reorder.

Author: Jan Chochol
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEASf_3TzBbnXm64HpnD5zCZEh8An9jN8ubMR=De-vOXHMHGeA@mail.gmail.com
2019-06-11 12:22:11 -04:00
Michael Paquier 727e45c8a4 Fix documentation of ALTER TABLE for stored values
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAA_gvZ002U6kovOHu0FsM7ieoCzdSqWBd7_KaQL0UMKg@mail.gmail.com
2019-06-11 12:58:51 +09:00
David Rowley 6c0c283837 Docs: concurrent builds of partitioned indexes are not supported
Document that CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY is not currently supported for
indexes on partitioned tables.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_CErd2z9L21Q8OGLD4TgH7yw1z9MAtHTSO13sXVG-yow@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
2019-06-06 12:36:37 +12:00
Michael Paquier fc115d0f9f Rework options of pg_checksums options for filenode handling
This makes the tool consistent with the option set of oid2name, which
has been historically using -f for filenodes, and has more recently
gained long options and --filenode via 1aaf532.

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/97045260-fb9e-e145-a950-cf7d28c4eaea@2ndquadrant.com
2019-05-30 16:58:17 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 00ef6e3b28 doc: Fix generated column documentation
The old text still had an implicit reference to the virtual behavior,
which was not in the final patch.

Author: Tobias Bussmann <t.bussmann@gmx.net>
2019-05-27 12:26:16 -04:00
Tom Lane 591fb289c3 Doc: fix typo in pgbench random_zipfian() documentation.
Per bug #15819 from Koizumi Satoru.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15819-e6191bef1f7334c0@postgresql.org
2019-05-24 11:16:06 -04:00
Michael Paquier 657c2384c6 Remove -o/--oids from pg_dumpall
This has been forgotten in 578b229, which has removed support for WITH
OIDS.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q99FcFCoG6ddke0V-AksGe82L_+bhDWgEfgZBakB840zA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Surafel Temesgen
2019-05-23 09:36:28 +09:00
Fujii Masao 03de5187d5 Mention ANALYZE boolean options in documentation.
Commit 41b54ba78e allowed not only VACUUM but also ANALYZE options
to take a boolean argument. But it forgot to update the documentation
for ANALYZE. This commit adds the descriptions about those ANALYZE
boolean options into the documentation.

This patch also updates tab-completion for ANALYZE boolean options.

Reported-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHTUt-kuwgiwe8f0AvTnB+ySqJWh95jvmh-qcoKW9YA9g@mail.gmail.com
2019-05-23 01:18:16 +09:00
Michael Paquier 03310dbea9 Fix some grammar in documentation of spgist and pgbench
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/92961161-9b49-e42f-0a72-d5d47e0ed4de@postgrespro.ru
Author: Liudmila Mantrova
Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-05-20 09:47:19 +09:00
Thomas Munro 098344be66 Fix copy-and-paste mistakes in documentation.
Reported-by: Vik Fearing
2019-05-08 21:16:36 +12:00
Fujii Masao b84dbc8eb8 Add TRUNCATE parameter to VACUUM.
This commit adds new parameter to VACUUM command, TRUNCATE,
which specifies that VACUUM should attempt to truncate off
any empty pages at the end of the table and allow the disk space
for the truncated pages to be returned to the operating system.

This parameter, if specified, overrides the vacuum_truncate
reloption. If neither the reloption nor the VACUUM option is
used, the default is true, as before.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoD+qtrSDL=GSma4Wd3kLYLeRC0hPna-YAdkDeV4z156vg@mail.gmail.com
2019-05-08 02:10:33 +09:00
Amit Kapila 7db0cde6b5 Revert "Avoid the creation of the free space map for small heap relations".
This feature was using a process local map to track the first few blocks
in the relation.  The map was reset each time we get the block with enough
freespace.  It was discussed that it would be better to track this map on
a per-relation basis in relcache and then invalidate the same whenever
vacuum frees up some space in the page or when FSM is created.  The new
design would be better both in terms of API design and performance.

List of commits reverted, in reverse chronological order:

06c8a5090e  Improve code comments in b0eaa4c51b.
13e8643bfc  During pg_upgrade, conditionally skip transfer of FSMs.
6f918159a9  Add more tests for FSM.
9c32e4c350  Clear the local map when not used.
29d108cdec  Update the documentation for FSM behavior..
08ecdfe7e5  Make FSM test portable.
b0eaa4c51b  Avoid creation of the free space map for small heap relations.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190416180452.3pm6uegx54iitbt5@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-05-07 09:30:24 +05:30
Bruce Momjian 26950273dc doc: clarify behavior of pg_upgrade's clone mode
Be more precise about the benefits of using clone mode.
2019-05-01 09:09:28 -04:00
Andres Freund b06a354e38 docs: Fix small copy & paste mistake.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190418005115.r4mat75wvlski3ij@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-04-30 16:20:07 -07:00
Alvaro Herrera 87259588d0 Fix tablespace inheritance for partitioned rels
Commit ca4103025d left a few loose ends.  The most important one
(broken pg_dump output) is already fixed by virtue of commit
3b23552ad8, but some things remained:

* When ALTER TABLE rewrites tables, the indexes must remain in the
  tablespace they were originally in.  This didn't work because
  index recreation during ALTER TABLE runs manufactured SQL (yuck),
  which runs afoul of default_tablespace in competition with the parent
  relation tablespace.  To fix, reset default_tablespace to the empty
  string temporarily, and add the TABLESPACE clause as appropriate.

* Setting a partitioned rel's tablespace to the database default is
  confusing; if it worked, it would direct the partitions to that
  tablespace regardless of default_tablespace.  But in reality it does
  not work, and making it work is a larger project.  Therefore, throw
  an error when this condition is detected, to alert the unwary.

Add some docs and tests, too.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_1c260nOt_vBJ067AZ3JXptXVRohDVMLEBmudX1YEx-A@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-25 10:31:32 -04:00
Michael Paquier 148266fa35 Fix collection of typos and grammar mistakes in docs and comments
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190330224333.GQ5815@telsasoft.com
2019-04-19 16:57:40 +09:00
Andres Freund f6b39171f3 docs: cleanup/remove/update references to OID column.
I (Andres) missed these in 578b229718.

Author: Justin Pryzby, editorialized a bit by Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Daniel Verite, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190408002847.GA904@telsasoft.com
2019-04-17 17:22:56 -07:00
Alvaro Herrera 421a2c4832 Tie loose ends in psql's new \dP command
* Remove one unnecessary pg_class join in SQL command.  Not needed,
  because we use a regclass cast instead.

* Doc: refer to "partitioned relations" rather than specifically tables,
  since indexes are also displayed.

* Rename "On table" column to "Table", for consistency with \di.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190407212525.GB10080@telsasoft.com
2019-04-17 18:38:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 64bbe10399 docs: clarify pg_upgrade's recovery behavior
The previous paragraph trying to explain --check, --link, and no --link
modes and the various points of failure was too complex.  Instead, use
bullet lists and sublists.

Reported-by: Daniel Gustafsson

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/qtqiv7hI87s_Xvz5ZXHCaH-1-_AZGpIDJowzlRjF3-AbCr3RhSNydM_JCuJ8DE4WZozrtxhIWmyYTbv0syKyfGB6cYMQitp9yN-NZMm-oAo=@yesql.se

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-04-17 18:01:02 -04:00
Michael Paquier a6dcf9df4d Rework handling of invalid indexes with REINDEX CONCURRENTLY
Per discussion with others, allowing REINDEX INDEX CONCURRENTLY to work
for invalid indexes when working directly on them can have a lot of
value to unlock situations with invalid indexes without having to use a
dance involving DROP INDEX followed by an extra CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY (which would not work for indexes with constraint
dependency anyway).  This also does not create extra bloat on the
relation involved as this works on individual indexes, so let's enable
it.

Note that REINDEX TABLE CONCURRENTLY still bypasses invalid indexes as
we don't want to bloat the number of indexes defined on a relation in
the event of multiple and successive failures of REINDEX CONCURRENTLY.

More regression tests are added to cover those behaviors, using an
invalid index created with CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY.

Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, Álvaro Herrera
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190411134947.GA22043@alvherre.pgsql
2019-04-17 09:33:51 +09:00
Fujii Masao c8e0f6bbdb Add index terms for reloptions in documentation.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-By: Alvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHyKt9-xkibVguPzYqKgb_2tdw14Ub1XDTu08kyHMiTQA@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-16 23:16:20 +09:00
Magnus Hagander 77bd49adba Show shared object statistics in pg_stat_database
This adds a row to the pg_stat_database view with datoid 0 and datname
NULL for those objects that are not in a database. This was added
particularly for checksums, but we were already tracking more satistics
for these objects, just not returning it.

Also add a checksum_last_failure column that holds the timestamptz of
the last checksum failure that occurred in a database (or in a
non-dataabase file), if any.

Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
2019-04-12 14:04:50 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 122fa9f942 doc: Fix whitespace
Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
2019-04-08 22:32:46 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 348f57ce5b doc: Add note about generated columns in foreign tables
Explain that it is not enforced that querying a generated column
returns data that is consistent with the data that was stored.  This
is similar to the note about constraints nearby.

Reported-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
2019-04-08 13:47:46 +02:00
Fujii Masao 119dcfad98 Add vacuum_truncate reloption.
vacuum_truncate controls whether vacuum tries to truncate off
any empty pages at the end of the table. Previously vacuum always
tried to do the truncation. However, the truncation could cause
some problems; for example, ACCESS EXCLUSIVE lock needs to
be taken on the table during the truncation and can cause
the query cancellation on the standby even if hot_standby_feedback
is true. Setting this reloption to false can be helpful to avoid
such problems.

Author: Tsunakawa Takayuki
Reviewed-By: Julien Rouhaud, Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Kirk Jamison and Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwE5UqFqSq1=kV3QtTUtXphTdyHA-8rAj4A=Y+e4kyp3BQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-08 16:43:57 +09:00
Michael Paquier e3865c3754 Tweak wording of documentation for pg_checksums
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190329143210.GI5815@telsasoft.com
2019-04-08 15:30:45 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 1c5d9270e3 psql \dP: list partitioned tables and indexes
The new command lists partitioned relations (tables and/or indexes),
possibly with their sizes, possibly including partitioned partitions;
their parents (if not top-level); if indexes show the tables they belong
to; and their descriptions.

While there are various possible improvements to this, having it in this
form is already a great improvement over not having any way to obtain
this report.

Author: Pavel Stěhule, with help from Mathias Brossard, Amit Langote and
	Justin Pryzby.
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Mathias Brossard, Melanie Plageman,
	Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
2019-04-07 15:07:21 -04:00
Robert Haas 6665305e17 Fix missing word.
Nathan Bossart

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/2C63765B-AD31-4F6C-8DA7-C8544634C714@amazon.com
2019-04-05 15:25:09 -04:00
Andres Freund 86cc06d1cf table: docs: fix typos and grammar.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190404055138.GA24864@telsasoft.com
2019-04-05 09:47:10 -07:00
Etsuro Fujita 3e6b0c4729 Doc: Update documentation on partitioning vs. foreign tables.
The limitations that it is not allowed to create/attach a foreign table
as a partition of an indexed partitioned table were not documented.

Reported-By: Stepan Yankevych
Author: Etsuro Fujita
Reviewed-By: Amit Langote
Backpatch-through: 11 where partitioned index was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1553869152.858391073.5f8m3n0x@frv53.fwdcdn.com
2019-04-05 20:55:06 +09:00
Michael Paquier bfc80683ce Fix some documentation in pg_rewind
Since 11, it is possible to use a non-superuser role when using an
online source cluster with pg_rewind as long as the role has proper
permissions to execute on the source all the functions used by
pg_rewind, and the documentation stated that a superuser is necessary.
Let's add at the same time all the details needed to create such a
role.

A second confusion which comes a lot from users is that it is necessary
to issue a checkpoint on a freshly-promoted standby so as its control
file has up-to-date timeline information which is used by pg_rewind to
validate the operation.  Let's document that properly.  This is
back-patched down to 9.5 where pg_rewind has been introduced.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEz5bpvbwVsYCaSMV80CBZ5-82nkMzbb+Bu=h1m=rLdn=g@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2019-04-05 10:37:59 +09:00
Tom Lane 7bac3acab4 Add a "SQLSTATE-only" error verbosity option to libpq and psql.
This is intended for use mostly in test scripts for external tools,
which could do without cross-PG-version variations in error message
wording.  Of course, the SQLSTATE isn't guaranteed stable either, but
it should be more so than the error message text.

Note: there's a bit of an ABI change for libpq here, but it seems
OK because if somebody compiles against a newer version of libpq-fe.h,
and then tries to pass PQERRORS_SQLSTATE to PQsetErrorVerbosity()
of an older libpq library, it will be accepted and then act like
PQERRORS_DEFAULT, thanks to the way the tests in pqBuildErrorMessage3
have historically been phrased.  That seems acceptable.

Didier Gautheron, reviewed by Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJRYxuKyj4zA+JGVrtx8OWAuBfE-_wN4sUMK4H49EuPed=mOBw@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 17:22:02 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 413ccaa74d pg_restore: Require "-f -" to mean stdout
The previous convention that stdout was selected by default when nothing
is specified was just too error-prone.

After a suggestion from Andrew Gierth.
Author: Euler Taveira
Reviewed-by: Yoshikazu Imai, José Arthur Benetasso Villanova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sgwrmhdv.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
2019-04-04 16:54:15 -03:00
Robert Haas a96c41feec Allow VACUUM to be run with index cleanup disabled.
This commit adds a new reloption, vacuum_index_cleanup, which
controls whether index cleanup is performed for a particular
relation by default.  It also adds a new option to the VACUUM
command, INDEX_CLEANUP, which can be used to override the
reloption.  If neither the reloption nor the VACUUM option is
used, the default is true, as before.

Masahiko Sawada, reviewed and tested by Nathan Bossart, Alvaro
Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Darafei Praliaskouski, and me.
The wording of the documentation is mostly due to me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAt5R3DNUZSjOoXDUY=naYPUOuffVsRzuTYMz29yLzQCA@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 15:04:43 -04:00
Andres Freund b73c3a1196 tableam: basic documentation.
This adds documentation about the user oriented parts of table access
methods (i.e. the default_table_access_method GUC and the USING clause
for CREATE TABLE etc), adds a basic chapter about the table access
method interface, and adds a note to storage.sgml that it's contents
don't necessarily apply for non-builtin AMs.

Author: Haribabu Kommi and Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-04-03 17:40:29 -07:00
Tomas Vondra ea569d64ac Add SETTINGS option to EXPLAIN, to print modified settings.
Query planning is affected by a number of configuration options, and it
may be crucial to know which of those options were set to non-default
values.  With this patch you can say EXPLAIN (SETTINGS ON) to include
that information in the query plan.  Only options affecting planning,
with values different from the built-in default are printed.

This patch also adds auto_explain.log_settings option, providing the
same capability in auto_explain module.

Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e1791b4c-df9c-be02-edc5-7c8874944be0@2ndquadrant.com
2019-04-04 00:04:31 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera f56f8f8da6 Support foreign keys that reference partitioned tables
Previously, while primary keys could be made on partitioned tables, it
was not possible to define foreign keys that reference those primary
keys.  Now it is possible to do that.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Jesper Pedersen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181102234158.735b3fevta63msbj@alvherre.pgsql
2019-04-03 14:40:21 -03:00
Michael Paquier 280e5f1405 Add progress reporting to pg_checksums
This adds a new option to pg_checksums called -P/--progress, showing
every second some information about the computation state of an
operation for --check and --enable (--disable only updates the control
file and is quick).  This requires a pre-scan of the data folder so as
the total size of checksummable items can be calculated, and then it
gets compared to the amount processed.

Similarly to what is done for pg_rewind and pg_basebackup, the
information printed in the progress report consists of the current
amount of data computed and the total amount of data to compute.  This
could be extended later on.

Author: Michael Banck, Bernd Helmle
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1535719851.1286.17.camel@credativ.de
2019-04-02 10:58:07 +09:00
Tom Lane 26a76cb640 Restrict pgbench's zipfian parameter to ensure good performance.
Remove the code that supported zipfian distribution parameters less
than 1.0, as it had undocumented performance hazards, and it's not
clear that the case is useful enough to justify either fixing or
documenting those hazards.

Also, since the code path for parameter > 1.0 could perform badly
for values very close to 1.0, establish a minimum allowed value
of 1.001.  This solution seems superior to the previous vague
documentation warning about small values not performing well.

Fabien Coelho, per a gripe from Tomas Vondra

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b5e172e9-ad22-48a3-86a3-589afa20e8f7@2ndquadrant.com
2019-04-01 17:37:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut cc8d415117 Unified logging system for command-line programs
This unifies the various ad hoc logging (message printing, error
printing) systems used throughout the command-line programs.

Features:

- Program name is automatically prefixed.

- Message string does not end with newline.  This removes a common
  source of inconsistencies and omissions.

- Additionally, a final newline is automatically stripped, simplifying
  use of PQerrorMessage() etc., another common source of mistakes.

- I converted error message strings to use %m where possible.

- As a result of the above several points, more translatable message
  strings can be shared between different components and between
  frontends and backend, without gratuitous punctuation or whitespace
  differences.

- There is support for setting a "log level".  This is not meant to be
  user-facing, but can be used internally to implement debug or
  verbose modes.

- Lazy argument evaluation, so no significant overhead if logging at
  some level is disabled.

- Some color in the messages, similar to gcc and clang.  Set
  PG_COLOR=auto to try it out.  Some colors are predefined, but can be
  customized by setting PG_COLORS.

- Common files (common/, fe_utils/, etc.) can handle logging much more
  simply by just using one API without worrying too much about the
  context of the calling program, requiring callbacks, or having to
  pass "progname" around everywhere.

- Some programs called setvbuf() to make sure that stderr is
  unbuffered, even on Windows.  But not all programs did that.  This
  is now done centrally.

Soft goals:

- Reduces vertical space use and visual complexity of error reporting
  in the source code.

- Encourages more deliberate classification of messages.  For example,
  in some cases it wasn't clear without analyzing the surrounding code
  whether a message was meant as an error or just an info.

- Concepts and terms are vaguely aligned with popular logging
  frameworks such as log4j and Python logging.

This is all just about printing stuff out.  Nothing affects program
flow (e.g., fatal exits).  The uses are just too varied to do that.
Some existing code had wrappers that do some kind of print-and-exit,
and I adapted those.

I tried to keep the output mostly the same, but there is a lot of
historical baggage to unwind and special cases to consider, and I
might not always have succeeded.  One significant change is that
pg_rewind used to write all error messages to stdout.  That is now
changed to stderr.

Reviewed-by: Donald Dong <xdong@csumb.edu>
Reviewed-by: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/6a609b43-4f57-7348-6480-bd022f924310@2ndquadrant.com
2019-04-01 20:01:35 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut ef6576f537 doc: Fix typo
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
2019-03-30 17:25:13 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut fc22b6623b Generated columns
This is an SQL-standard feature that allows creating columns that are
computed from expressions rather than assigned, similar to a view or
materialized view but on a column basis.

This implements one kind of generated column: stored (computed on
write).  Another kind, virtual (computed on read), is planned for the
future, and some room is left for it.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b151f851-4019-bdb1-699e-ebab07d2f40a@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-30 08:15:57 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 173268f4d0 doc: Small documentation review for REINDEX CONCURRENTLY
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzbyj@telsasoft.com>
2019-03-29 22:47:33 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 0267629e18 doc: Fix typo
Author: Bossart, Nathan <bossartn@amazon.com>
2019-03-29 22:41:19 +01:00
Michael Paquier a7cc52370b Reorganize Notes section in documentation of pg_checksums
This commit reorders the paragraphs of the Notes section in order of
importance, and clarifies better the safe uses of pg_checksums for
replication setups.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1903231404280.18811@lancre
2019-03-29 23:00:51 +09:00
Robert Haas 41b54ba78e Allow existing VACUUM options to take a Boolean argument.
This makes VACUUM work more like EXPLAIN already does without changing
the meaning of any commands that already work.  It is intended to
facilitate the addition of future VACUUM options that may take
non-Boolean parameters or that default to false.

Masahiko Sawada, reviewed by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobpYrXr5sUaEe_T0boabV0DSm=utSOZzwCUNqfLEEm8Mw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoBaFcKBAeL5_++j+Vzir2vBBcF4juW7qH8b3HsQY=Q6+w@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-29 08:22:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 5dc92b844e REINDEX CONCURRENTLY
This adds the CONCURRENTLY option to the REINDEX command.  A REINDEX
CONCURRENTLY on a specific index creates a new index (like CREATE
INDEX CONCURRENTLY), then renames the old index away and the new index
in place and adjusts the dependencies, and then drops the old
index (like DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY).  The REINDEX command also has
the capability to run its other variants (TABLE, DATABASE) with the
CONCURRENTLY option (but not SYSTEM).

The reindexdb command gets the --concurrently option.

Author: Michael Paquier, Andreas Karlsson, Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Fujii Masao, Jim Nasby, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/60052986-956b-4478-45ed-8bd119e9b9cf%402ndquadrant.com#74948a1044c56c5e817a5050f554ddee
2019-03-29 08:26:33 +01:00
Tomas Vondra 7300a69950 Add support for multivariate MCV lists
Introduce a third extended statistic type, supported by the CREATE
STATISTICS command - MCV lists, a generalization of the statistic
already built and used for individual columns.

Compared to the already supported types (n-distinct coefficients and
functional dependencies), MCV lists are more complex, include column
values and allow estimation of much wider range of common clauses
(equality and inequality conditions, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL etc.).
Similarly to the other types, a new pseudo-type (pg_mcv_list) is used.

Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Mark Dilger, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dfdac334-9cf2-2597-fb27-f0fb3753f435@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-27 18:32:18 +01:00
Michael Paquier ecfed4a122 Improve error handling of column references in expression transformation
Column references are not allowed in default expressions and partition
bound expressions, and are restricted as such once the transformation of
their expressions is done.  However, trying to use more complex column
references can lead to confusing error messages.  For example, trying to
use a two-field column reference name for default expressions and
partition bounds leads to "missing FROM-clause entry for table", which
makes no sense in their respective context.

In order to make the errors generated more useful, this commit adds more
verbose messages when transforming column references depending on the
context.  This has a little consequence though: for example an
expression using an aggregate with a column reference as argument would
cause an error to be generated for the column reference, while the
aggregate was the problem reported before this commit because column
references get transformed first.

The confusion exists for default expressions for a long time, and the
problem is new as of v12 for partition bounds.  Still per the lack of
complaints on the matter no backpatch is done.

The patch has been written by Amit Langote and me, and Tom Lane has
provided the improvement of the documentation for default expressions on
the CREATE TABLE page.

Author: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190326020853.GM2558@paquier.xyz
2019-03-27 21:04:25 +09:00
Tom Lane b3bd819632 Doc: clarify that REASSIGN OWNED doesn't handle default privileges.
It doesn't touch regular privileges either, but only the latter was
explicitly stated.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/155348282848.9808.12629518043813943231@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2019-03-25 17:18:05 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 25ee70511e pgbench: Remove \cset
Partial revert of commit 6260cc550b, "pgbench: add \cset and \gset
commands".

While \gset is widely considered a useful and necessary tool for user-
defined benchmarks, \cset does not have as much value, and its
implementation was considered "not to be up to project standards"
(though I, Álvaro, can't quite understand exactly how).  Therefore,
remove \cset.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1903230716030.18811@lancre
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/201901101900.mv7zduch6sad@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-25 12:16:07 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut 280a408b48 Transaction chaining
Add command variants COMMIT AND CHAIN and ROLLBACK AND CHAIN, which
start new transactions with the same transaction characteristics as the
just finished one, per SQL standard.

Support for transaction chaining in PL/pgSQL is also added.  This
functionality is especially useful when running COMMIT in a loop in
PL/pgSQL.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/28536681-324b-10dc-ade8-ab46f7645a5a@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-24 11:33:02 +01:00
Michael Paquier e0090c8690 Add option -N/--no-sync to pg_checksums
This is an option consistent with what pg_dump, pg_rewind and
pg_basebackup provide which is useful for leveraging the I/O effort when
testing things, not to be used in a production environment.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Fabien Coelho, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-23 08:37:36 +09:00
Michael Paquier ed308d7837 Add options to enable and disable checksums in pg_checksums
An offline cluster can now work with more modes in pg_checksums:
- --enable enables checksums in a cluster, updating all blocks with a
correct checksum, and updating the control file at the end.
- --disable disables checksums in a cluster, updating only the control
file.
- --check is an extra option able to verify checksums for a cluster, and
the default used if no mode is specified.

When running --enable or --disable, the data folder gets fsync'd for
durability, and then it is followed by a control file update and flush
to keep the operation consistent should the tool be interrupted, killed
or the host unplugged.  If no mode is specified in the options, then
--check is used for compatibility with older versions of pg_checksums
(named pg_verify_checksums in v11 where it was introduced).

Author: Michael Banck, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Magnus Hagander, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-23 08:12:55 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 5e1963fb76 Collations with nondeterministic comparison
This adds a flag "deterministic" to collations.  If that is false,
such a collation disables various optimizations that assume that
strings are equal only if they are byte-wise equal.  That then allows
use cases such as case-insensitive or accent-insensitive comparisons
or handling of strings with different Unicode normal forms.

This functionality is only supported with the ICU provider.  At least
glibc doesn't appear to have any locales that work in a
nondeterministic way, so it's not worth supporting this for the libc
provider.

The term "deterministic comparison" in this context is from Unicode
Technical Standard #10
(https://unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Deterministic_Comparison).

This patch makes changes in three areas:

- CREATE COLLATION DDL changes and system catalog changes to support
  this new flag.

- Many executor nodes and auxiliary code are extended to track
  collations.  Previously, this code would just throw away collation
  information, because the eventually-called user-defined functions
  didn't use it since they only cared about equality, which didn't
  need collation information.

- String data type functions that do equality comparisons and hashing
  are changed to take the (non-)deterministic flag into account.  For
  comparison, this just means skipping various shortcuts and tie
  breakers that use byte-wise comparison.  For hashing, we first need
  to convert the input string to a canonical "sort key" using the ICU
  analogue of strxfrm().

Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1ccc668f-4cbc-0bef-af67-450b47cdfee7@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-22 12:12:43 +01:00
Andrew Gierth 01bde4fa4c Implement OR REPLACE option for CREATE AGGREGATE.
Aggregates have acquired a dozen or so optional attributes in recent
years for things like parallel query and moving-aggregate mode; the
lack of an OR REPLACE option to add or change these for an existing
agg makes extension upgrades gratuitously hard. Rectify.
2019-03-19 01:16:50 +00:00
Amit Kapila 13e8643bfc During pg_upgrade, conditionally skip transfer of FSMs.
If a heap on the old cluster has 4 pages or fewer, and the old cluster
was PG v11 or earlier, don't copy or link the FSM. This will shrink
space usage for installations with large numbers of small tables.

This will allow pg_upgrade to take advantage of commit b0eaa4c51b where
we have avoided creation of the free space map for small heap relations.

Author: John Naylor
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPNZCu4cOdm3uGnNEGXivy7Gz8UWyQjynDpdkPGabQ18_zK6g%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-15 08:25:57 +05:30
Robert Haas bbb96c3704 Allow ALTER TABLE .. SET NOT NULL to skip provably unnecessary scans.
If existing CHECK or NOT NULL constraints preclude the presence
of nulls, we need not look to see whether any are present.

Sergei Kornilov, reviewed by Stephen Frost, Ildar Musin, David Rowley,
and by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/81911511895540@web58j.yandex.ru
2019-03-13 08:55:00 -04:00
Michael Paquier 6dd263cfaa Rename pg_verify_checksums to pg_checksums
The current tool name is too restrictive and focuses only on verifying
checksums.  As more options to control checksums for an offline cluster
are planned to be added, switch to a more generic name.  Documentation
as well as all past references to the tool are updated.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Fabien Coelho, Seigei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-13 10:43:20 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan a478415281 pgbench: increase the maximum number of variables/arguments
pgbench's arbitrary limit of 10 arguments for SQL statements or
metacommands is far too low. Increase it to 256.

This results in a very modest increase in memory usage, not enough to
worry about.

The maximum includes the SQL statement or metacommand. This is reflected
in the comments and revised TAP tests.

Simon Riggs and Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker with some light editing by me.
Reviewed by: David Rowley and Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jJiMJOAf-dLoHuR-8GENiK+eHTY=Omw38Qx7j2g0NDTXA@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-11 13:18:37 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera fc84c05acd Fix documentation on partitioning vs. foreign tables
1. The PARTITION OF clause of CREATE FOREIGN TABLE was not explained in
   the CREATE FOREIGN TABLE reference page.  Add it.
   (Postgres 10 onwards)

2. The limitation that tuple routing cannot target partitions that are
   foreign tables was not documented clearly enough.  Improve wording.
   (Postgres 10 onwards)

3. The UPDATE tuple re-routing concurrency behavior was explained in
   the DDL chapter, which doesn't seem the right place.  Move it to the
   UPDATE reference page instead.  (Postgres 11 onwards).

Authors: Amit Langote, David Rowley.
Reviewed-by: Etsuro Fujita.
Reported-by: Derek Hans
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGrP7a3Xc1Qy_B2WJcgAD8uQTS_NDcJn06O5mtS_Ne1nYhBsyw@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-10 19:45:29 -03:00
Tom Lane caf626b2cd Convert [autovacuum_]vacuum_cost_delay into floating-point GUCs.
This change makes it possible to specify sub-millisecond delays,
which work well on most modern platforms, though that was not true
when the cost-delay feature was designed.

To support this without breaking existing configuration entries,
improve guc.c to allow floating-point GUCs to have units.  Also,
allow "us" (microseconds) as an input/output unit for time-unit GUCs.
(It's not allowed as a base unit, at least not yet.)

Likewise change the autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay reloption to be
floating-point; this forces a catversion bump because the layout of
StdRdOptions changes.

This patch doesn't in itself change the default values or allowed
ranges for these parameters, and it should not affect the behavior
for any already-allowed setting for them.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1798.1552165479@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-03-10 15:01:39 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov f2e403803f Support for INCLUDE attributes in GiST indexes
Similarly to B-tree, GiST index access method gets support of INCLUDE
attributes.  These attributes aren't used for tree navigation and aren't
present in non-leaf pages.  But they are present in leaf pages and can be
fetched during index-only scan.

The point of having INCLUDE attributes in GiST indexes is slightly different
from the point of having them in B-tree.  The main point of INCLUDE attributes
in B-tree is to define UNIQUE constraint over part of attributes enabled for
index-only scan.  In GiST the main point of INCLUDE attributes is to use
index-only scan for attributes, whose data types don't have GiST opclasses.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/73A1A452-AD5F-40D4-BD61-978622FF75C1%40yandex-team.ru
Author: Andrey Borodin, with small changes by me
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson
2019-03-10 11:37:17 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera 7e413a0f82 pg_dump: allow multiple rows per insert
This is useful to speed up loading data in a different database engine.

Authors: Surafel Temesgen and David Rowley.  Lightly edited by Álvaro.
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q9kumSdnRBzvRJvSRf2+BH20YmSvzqOkvwpEmodD-xv6g@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-07 09:34:17 -03:00
Andres Freund 8586bf7ed8 tableam: introduce table AM infrastructure.
This introduces the concept of table access methods, i.e. CREATE
  ACCESS METHOD ... TYPE TABLE and
  CREATE TABLE ... USING (storage-engine).
No table access functionality is delegated to table AMs as of this
commit, that'll be done in following commits.

Subsequent commits will incrementally abstract table access
functionality to be routed through table access methods. That change
is too large to be reviewed & committed at once, so it'll be done
incrementally.

Docs will be updated at the end, as adding them incrementally would
likely make them less coherent, and definitely is a lot more work,
without a lot of benefit.

Table access methods are specified similar to index access methods,
i.e. pg_am.amhandler returns, as INTERNAL, a pointer to a struct with
callbacks. In contrast to index AMs that struct needs to live as long
as a backend, typically that's achieved by just returning a pointer to
a constant struct.

Psql's \d+ now displays a table's access method. That can be disabled
with HIDE_TABLEAM=true, which is mainly useful so regression tests can
be run against different AMs.  It's quite possible that this behaviour
still needs to be fine tuned.

For now it's not allowed to set a table AM for a partitioned table, as
we've not resolved how partitions would inherit that. Disallowing
allows us to introduce, if we decide that's the way forward, such a
behaviour without a compatibility break.

Catversion bumped, to add the heap table AM and references to it.

Author: Haribabu Kommi, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Dimitri Golgov and others
Discussion:
    https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
    https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
    https://postgr.es/m/20190107235616.6lur25ph22u5u5av@alap3.anarazel.de
    https://postgr.es/m/20190304234700.w5tmhducs5wxgzls@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-03-06 09:54:38 -08:00
Andrew Dunstan f092de0503 Add --exclude-database option to pg_dumpall
This option functions similarly to pg_dump's --exclude-table option, but
for database names. The option can be given once, and the argument can
be a pattern including wildcard characters.

Author: Andrew Dunstan.
Reviewd-by: Fabien Coelho and Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/43a54a47-4aa7-c70e-9ca6-648f436dd6e6@2ndQuadrant.com
2019-03-01 10:47:44 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera 2c31825fb9 Improve docs for ALTER TABLE .. SET TABLESPACE
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190220173815.GA7959@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
2019-02-28 19:24:21 -03:00
Andrew Dunstan af25bc03e1 Provide an extra-float-digits setting for pg_dump / pg_dumpall
Changes made by commit 02ddd49 mean that dumps made against pre version
12 instances are no longer comparable with those made against version 12
or later instances. This makes cross-version upgrade testing fail in the
buildfarm. Experimentation has shown that the error is cured if the
dumps are made when extra_float_digits is set to 0. Hence this patch
allows for it to be explicitly set rather than relying on pg_dump's
builtin default (3 in almost all cases). This feature might have other
uses, but should not normally be used.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c76f7051-8fd3-ec10-7579-1f8842305b85@2ndQuadrant.com
2019-02-18 07:37:07 -05:00
Tom Lane 608b167f9f Allow user control of CTE materialization, and change the default behavior.
Historically we've always materialized the full output of a CTE query,
treating WITH as an optimization fence (so that, for example, restrictions
from the outer query cannot be pushed into it).  This is appropriate when
the CTE query is INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE, or is recursive; but when the CTE
query is non-recursive and side-effect-free, there's no hazard of changing
the query results by pushing restrictions down.

Another argument for materialization is that it can avoid duplicate
computation of an expensive WITH query --- but that only applies if
the WITH query is called more than once in the outer query.  Even then
it could still be a net loss, if each call has restrictions that
would allow just a small part of the WITH query to be computed.

Hence, let's change the behavior for WITH queries that are non-recursive
and side-effect-free.  By default, we will inline them into the outer
query (removing the optimization fence) if they are called just once.
If they are called more than once, we will keep the old behavior by
default, but the user can override this and force inlining by specifying
NOT MATERIALIZED.  Lastly, the user can force the old behavior by
specifying MATERIALIZED; this would mainly be useful when the query had
deliberately been employing WITH as an optimization fence to prevent a
poor choice of plan.

Andreas Karlsson, Andrew Gierth, David Fetter

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sh48ffhb.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
2019-02-16 16:11:12 -05:00
Tom Lane 1fb57af920 Create the infrastructure for planner support functions.
Rename/repurpose pg_proc.protransform as "prosupport".  The idea is
still that it names an internal function that provides knowledge to
the planner about the behavior of the function it's attached to;
but redesign the API specification so that it's not limited to doing
just one thing, but can support an extensible set of requests.

The original purpose of simplifying a function call is handled by
the first request type to be invented, SupportRequestSimplify.
Adjust all the existing transform functions to handle this API,
and rename them fron "xxx_transform" to "xxx_support" to reflect
the potential generalization of what they do.  (Since we never
previously provided any way for extensions to add transform functions,
this change doesn't create an API break for them.)

Also add DDL and pg_dump support for attaching a support function to a
user-defined function.  Unfortunately, DDL access has to be restricted
to superusers, at least for now; but seeing that support functions
will pretty much have to be written in C, that limitation is just
theoretical.  (This support is untested in this patch, but a follow-on
patch will add cases that exercise it.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15193.1548028093@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-02-09 18:08:48 -05:00
Michael Paquier be12aa47e6 Clarify behavior of initdb's --allow-group-access on Windows in docs
The option is ignored on Windows, and GUC data_directory_mode already
mentioned that within its description in the documentation.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reported-by: Haribabu Kommi, David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJrrPGefxTG43yk6BrOC7ZcMnCTccG9+inCSncvyys_t8Ev9cQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
2019-02-04 09:57:20 +09:00
Michael Paquier 00d1e88d36 Add --min-xid-age and --min-mxid-age options to vacuumdb
These two new options can be used to improve the selectivity of
relations to vacuum or analyze even further depending on the age of
respectively their transaction ID or multixact ID, so as it is possible
to prioritize tables to prevent wraparound of one or the other.
Combined with --table, it is possible to target a subset of tables to
choose as potential processing targets.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
2019-01-31 13:07:56 +09:00
Magnus Hagander 9745b528f7 Improve wording about WAL files in tar mode of pg_basebackup
Author: Alex Kliukin
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Magnus Hagander
2019-01-29 10:42:41 +01:00
Tom Lane 6d3ede5f1c Fix psql's "\g target" meta-command to work with COPY TO STDOUT.
Previously, \g would successfully execute the COPY command, but
the target specification if any was ignored, so that the data was
always dumped to the regular query output target.  This seems like
a clear bug, so let's not just fix it but back-patch it.

While at it, adjust the documentation for \copy to recommend
"COPY ... TO STDOUT \g foo" as a plausible alternative.

Back-patch to 9.5.  The problem exists much further back, but the
code associated with \g was refactored enough in 9.5 that we'd
need a significantly different patch for 9.4, and it doesn't
seem worth the trouble.

Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15dadc39-e050-4d46-956b-dcc4ed098753@manitou-mail.org
2019-01-26 14:15:42 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 7c079d7417 Allow generalized expression syntax for partition bounds
Previously, only literals were allowed.  This change allows general
expressions, including functions calls, which are evaluated at the
time the DDL command is executed.

Besides offering some more functionality, it simplifies the parser
structures and removes some inconsistencies in how the literals were
handled.

Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tom Lane, Amit Langote
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9f88b5e0-6da2-5227-20d0-0d7012beaa1c@lab.ntt.co.jp/
2019-01-25 11:28:49 +01:00
Tom Lane e6c3ba7fbf Fix portability problem in pgbench.
The pgbench regression test supposed that srandom() with a specific value
would result in deterministic output from random(), as required by POSIX.
It emerges however that OpenBSD is too smart to be constrained by mere
standards, so their random() emits nondeterministic output anyway.
While a workaround does exist, what seems like a better fix is to stop
relying on the platform's srandom()/random() altogether, so that what
you get from --random-seed=N is not merely deterministic but platform
independent.  Hence, use a separate pg_jrand48() random sequence in
place of random().

Also adjust the regression test case that's supposed to detect
nondeterminism so that it's more likely to detect it; the original
choice of random_zipfian parameter tended to produce the same output
all the time even if the underlying behavior wasn't deterministic.

In passing, improve pgbench's docs about random_zipfian().

Back-patch to v11 where this code was introduced.

Fabien Coelho and Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4615.1547792324@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-01-24 11:31:54 -05:00
Michael Paquier efab708997 Adjust documentation for vacuumdb --disable-page-skipping
This makes the description more consistent with the other options, and
the mapping with VACUUM is intuitive.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
2019-01-22 11:21:07 +09:00
Tomas Vondra 31f3817402 Allow COPY FROM to filter data using WHERE conditions
Extends the COPY FROM command with a WHERE condition, which allows doing
various types of filtering while importing the data (random sampling,
condition on a data column, etc.).  Until now such filtering required
either preprocessing of the input data, or importing all data and then
filtering in the database. COPY FROM ... WHERE is an easy-to-use and
low-overhead alternative for most simple cases.

Author: Surafel Temesgen
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Masahiko Sawada, Lim Myungkyu
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CALAY4q_DdpWDuB5-Zyi-oTtO2uSk8pmy+dupiRe3AvAc++1imA@mail.gmail.com
2019-01-20 00:22:14 +01:00
Michael Paquier c5660e0aa5 Restrict the use of temporary namespace in two-phase transactions
Attempting to use a temporary table within a two-phase transaction is
forbidden for ages.  However, there have been uncovered grounds for
a couple of other object types and commands which work on temporary
objects with two-phase commit.  In short, trying to create, lock or drop
an object on a temporary schema should not be authorized within a
two-phase transaction, as it would cause its state to create
dependencies with other sessions, causing all sorts of side effects with
the existing session or other sessions spawned later on trying to use
the same temporary schema name.

Regression tests are added to cover all the grounds found, the original
report mentioned function creation, but monitoring closer there are many
other patterns with LOCK, DROP or CREATE EXTENSION which are involved.
One of the symptoms resulting in combining both is that the session
which used the temporary schema is not able to shut down completely,
waiting for being able to drop the temporary schema, something that it
cannot complete because of the two-phase transaction involved with
temporary objects.  In this case the client is able to disconnect but
the session remains alive on the backend-side, potentially blocking
connection backend slots from being used.  Other problems reported could
also involve server crashes.

This is back-patched down to v10, which is where 9b013dc has introduced
MyXactFlags, something that this patch relies on.

Reported-by: Alexey Bashtanov
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5d910e2e-0db8-ec06-dd5f-baec420513c3@imap.cc
Backpatch-through: 10
2019-01-18 09:21:44 +09:00
Tatsuo Ishii 2472ea0a53 Doc: enhance pgbench manual.
Clarify the difference between "prepared mode" and other query modes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181030.103654.2249812451112831300.t-ishii@sraoss.co.jp
Reviewed by: Fabien Coelh and Alvaro Herrera.
2019-01-17 15:34:41 +09:00
Michael Paquier 42e2a58071 Fix typos in documentation and for one wait event
These have been found while cross-checking for the use of unique words
in the documentation, and a wait event was not getting generated in a way
consistent to what the documentation provided.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b5a3a85-899a-ae62-dbab-1e7943aa5ab1@gmail.com
2019-01-15 08:47:01 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 6260cc550b pgbench: add \cset and \gset commands
These commands allow assignment of values produced by queries to pgbench
variables, where they can be used by further commands.  \gset terminates
a command sequence (just like a bare semicolon); \cset separates
multiple queries in a compound command, like an escaped semicolon (\;).
A prefix can be provided to the \-command and is prepended to the name
of each output column to produce the final variable name.

This feature allows pgbench scripts to react meaningfully to the actual
database contents, allowing more powerful benchmarks to be written.

Authors: Fabien Coelho, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Stephen Frost <sfrost@snowman.net>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Tatsuo Ishii <ishii@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.sabih@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1607091005330.3412@sto
2019-01-10 13:42:20 -03:00
Michael Paquier 354e95d1f2 Add --disable-page-skipping and --skip-locked to vacuumdb
DISABLE_PAGE_SKIPPING is available since v9.6, and SKIP_LOCKED since
v12.  They lacked equivalents for vacuumdb, so this closes the gap.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
2019-01-08 10:52:29 +09:00
Michael Paquier f7ea1a4233 Clarify referential actions in docs of CREATE/ALTER TABLE
The documentation of ON DELETE and ON UPDATE uses the term "action",
which is also used on the ALTER TABLE page for other purposes.  This
commit renames the term to "referential_action", which is more
consistent with the SQL specification.  The new term is now used on the
documentation of both CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE for consistency.

Reported-by: Brigitte Blanc-Lafay
Author: Lætitia Avrot
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB_COdiHEVVs0uB+uYCjjYUwQ4YFFekppq+Xqv6qAM8+cd42gA@mail.gmail.com
2018-12-28 10:19:14 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera ca4103025d Fix tablespace handling for partitioned tables
When partitioned tables were introduced, we failed to realize that by
copying the tablespace handling for other relation kinds with no
physical storage we were causing the secondary effect that their
partitions would not automatically inherit the tablespace setting.  This
is surprising and unhelpful, so change it to adopt the behavior
introduced in pg11 (commit 33e6c34c32) for partitioned indexes: the
parent relation remembers the tablespace specification, which is then
used for any new partitions that don't declare one.

Because this commit changes behavior of the TABLESPACE clause for
partitioned tables (it's no longer a no-op), it is not backpatched.

Author: David Rowley, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f9SxVzqDrGD1teosFd6jBMM0UEaa14_8mRvcWE19Tu0hA@mail.gmail.com
2018-12-17 15:37:40 -03:00
Tom Lane d65ddb2b56 Doc: improve documentation about ALTER LARGE OBJECT requirements.
Unlike other ALTER ref pages, this one neglected to mention that
ALTER OWNER requires being a member of the new owning role.
Per bug #15546 from Stefan Kadow.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15546-0558c75fd2025e7c@postgresql.org
2018-12-11 11:21:36 -05:00
Tom Lane 1f66c657f2 Doc: document that we expect CHECK constraint conditions to be immutable.
This restriction is implicit in the check-only-once implementation we use
for table and domain constraints, but it wasn't spelled out anywhere, nor
was there any advice about how to alter a constraint's behavior safely.
Improve that.

I was also dissatisfied with the documentation of ALTER DOMAIN VALIDATE
CONSTRAINT, which entirely failed to explain the use of that feature; and
thence decided that ALTER TABLE VALIDATE CONSTRAINT could be documented
better as well.

Perhaps we should back-patch this, along with the related commit 36d442a25,
but for now I refrained.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/12539.1544107316@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-12-07 16:40:58 -05:00
Tom Lane 1464755fc4 Doc: remove obsolete statements about system OID columns in ALTER TABLE.
Missed in commit 578b22971.
2018-12-07 14:50:46 -05:00
Tom Lane afc4a78a30 Refactor documentation about privileges to centralize the info.
Expand section 5.6 "Privileges" to include the full definition of
each privilege type, and an explanation of aclitem privilege displays,
along with some helpful summary tables.  Most of this material came
out of the GRANT reference page, although some of it is new.
Adjust a bunch of links that were pointing to GRANT to point to 5.6.

Fabien Coelho and Tom Lane, reviewed by Bradley DeJong

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1807311735200.20743@lancre
2018-12-03 11:40:49 -05:00
Tom Lane 2d34ad8430 Add a --socketdir option to pg_upgrade.
This allows control of the directory in which the postmaster sockets
are created for the temporary postmasters started by pg_upgrade.
The default location remains the current working directory, which is
typically fine, but if it is deeply nested then its pathname might
be too long to be a socket name.

In passing, clean up some messiness in pg_upgrade's option handling,
particularly the confusing and undocumented way that configuration-only
datadirs were handled.  And fix check_required_directory's substantially
under-baked cleanup of directory pathnames.

Daniel Gustafsson, reviewed by Hironobu Suzuki, some code cleanup by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E72DD5C3-2268-48A5-A907-ED4B34BEC223@yesql.se
2018-12-01 15:45:11 -05:00
Tom Lane aa2ba50c2c Add CSV table output mode in psql.
"\pset format csv", or --csv, selects comma-separated values table format.
This is compliant with RFC 4180, except that we aren't too picky about
whether the record separator is LF or CRLF; also, the user may choose a
field separator other than comma.

This output format is directly compatible with the server's COPY CSV
format, and will also be useful as input to other programs.  It's
considerably safer for that purpose than the old recommendation to
use "unaligned" format, since the latter couldn't handle data
containing the field separator character.

Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and David Fetter, some
tweaking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a8de371e-006f-4f92-ab72-2bbe3ee78f03@manitou-mail.org
2018-11-26 15:18:55 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera 36d442a25a Clarify that cross-row constraints are unsupported
Maybe we'll implement them later, or maybe not, but let's make the statu
quo clear for now.

Author: Lætitia Avrot, Patrick Francelle
Reviewers: too many to list
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB_COdhUuzNFOJfc7SNNso5rOuVA3ui93KMVunEM8Yih+K5A6A@mail.gmail.com
2018-11-26 12:38:19 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut 2dedf4d9a8 Integrate recovery.conf into postgresql.conf
recovery.conf settings are now set in postgresql.conf (or other GUC
sources).  Currently, all the affected settings are PGC_POSTMASTER;
this could be refined in the future case by case.

Recovery is now initiated by a file recovery.signal.  Standby mode is
initiated by a file standby.signal.  The standby_mode setting is
gone.  If a recovery.conf file is found, an error is issued.

The trigger_file setting has been renamed to promote_trigger_file as
part of the move.

The documentation chapter "Recovery Configuration" has been integrated
into "Server Configuration".

pg_basebackup -R now appends settings to postgresql.auto.conf and
creates a standby.signal file.

Author: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen <ams@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/607741529606767@web3g.yandex.ru/
2018-11-25 16:33:40 +01:00
Michael Paquier d392e9bdea Clarify documentation about PASSWORD in CREATE/ALTER ROLE
The documentation of CREATE/ALTER ROLE has been missing two things
related to PASSWORD:
- The password value provided needs to be quoted, some places of the
documentation marked the field with quotes, but not others, which led to
confusion.
- PASSWORD NULL was not provided consistently, with ENCRYPTED being not
compatible with it.

Reported-by: Steven Winfield
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/154282901979.1316.7418475422120496802@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-11-23 09:10:24 +09:00
Andres Freund 578b229718 Remove WITH OIDS support, change oid catalog column visibility.
Previously tables declared WITH OIDS, including a significant fraction
of the catalog tables, stored the oid column not as a normal column,
but as part of the tuple header.

This special column was not shown by default, which was somewhat odd,
as it's often (consider e.g. pg_class.oid) one of the more important
parts of a row.  Neither pg_dump nor COPY included the contents of the
oid column by default.

The fact that the oid column was not an ordinary column necessitated a
significant amount of special case code to support oid columns. That
already was painful for the existing, but upcoming work aiming to make
table storage pluggable, would have required expanding and duplicating
that "specialness" significantly.

WITH OIDS has been deprecated since 2005 (commit ff02d0a05280e0).
Remove it.

Removing includes:
- CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE syntax for declaring the table to be
  WITH OIDS has been removed (WITH (oids[ = true]) will error out)
- pg_dump does not support dumping tables declared WITH OIDS and will
  issue a warning when dumping one (and ignore the oid column).
- restoring an pg_dump archive with pg_restore will warn when
  restoring a table with oid contents (and ignore the oid column)
- COPY will refuse to load binary dump that includes oids.
- pg_upgrade will error out when encountering tables declared WITH
  OIDS, they have to be altered to remove the oid column first.
- Functionality to access the oid of the last inserted row (like
  plpgsql's RESULT_OID, spi's SPI_lastoid, ...) has been removed.

The syntax for declaring a table WITHOUT OIDS (or WITH (oids = false)
for CREATE TABLE) is still supported. While that requires a bit of
support code, it seems unnecessary to break applications / dumps that
do not use oids, and are explicit about not using them.

The biggest user of WITH OID columns was postgres' catalog. This
commit changes all 'magic' oid columns to be columns that are normally
declared and stored. To reduce unnecessary query breakage all the
newly added columns are still named 'oid', even if a table's column
naming scheme would indicate 'reloid' or such.  This obviously
requires adapting a lot code, mostly replacing oid access via
HeapTupleGetOid() with access to the underlying Form_pg_*->oid column.

The bootstrap process now assigns oids for all oid columns in
genbki.pl that do not have an explicit value (starting at the largest
oid previously used), only oids assigned later by oids will be above
FirstBootstrapObjectId. As the oid column now is a normal column the
special bootstrap syntax for oids has been removed.

Oids are not automatically assigned during insertion anymore, all
backend code explicitly assigns oids with GetNewOidWithIndex(). For
the rare case that insertions into the catalog via SQL are called for
the new pg_nextoid() function can be used (which only works on catalog
tables).

The fact that oid columns on system tables are now normal columns
means that they will be included in the set of columns expanded
by * (i.e. SELECT * FROM pg_class will now include the table's oid,
previously it did not). It'd not technically be hard to hide oid
column by default, but that'd mean confusing behavior would either
have to be carried forward forever, or it'd cause breakage down the
line.

While it's not unlikely that further adjustments are needed, the
scope/invasiveness of the patch makes it worthwhile to get merge this
now. It's painful to maintain externally, too complicated to commit
after the code code freeze, and a dependency of a number of other
patches.

Catversion bump, for obvious reasons.

Author: Andres Freund, with contributions by John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180930034810.ywp2c7awz7opzcfr@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-11-20 16:00:17 -08:00
Peter Eisentraut 69bae23727 doc: Clarify CREATE TYPE ENUM documentation
The documentation claimed that an enum type requires "one or more"
labels, but since 1fd9883ff4, zero labels are also allowed.

Reported-by: Lukas Eder <lukas.eder@gmail.com>
Bug: #15356
2018-11-20 09:37:02 +01:00
Alvaro Herrera 5c9a5513a3 Disallow COPY FREEZE on partitioned tables
This didn't actually work: COPY would fail to flush the right files, and
instead would try to flush a non-existing file, causing the whole
transaction to fail.

Cope by raising an error as soon as the command is sent instead, to
avoid a nasty later surprise.  Of course, it would be much better to
make it work, but we don't have a patch for that yet, and we don't know
if we'll want to backpatch one when we do.

Reported-by: Tomas Vondra
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Steve Singer, Tomas Vondra
2018-11-19 11:16:28 -03:00
Tom Lane 51eaaafb85 Doc: remove claim that all \pset format options are unique in 1 letter.
This hasn't been correct since 9.3 added "latex-longtable".

I left the phraseology "Unique abbreviations are allowed" alone.
It's correct as far as it goes, and we are studiously refraining
from specifying exactly what happens if you give a non-unique
abbreviation.  (The answer in the back branches is "you get a
backwards-compatible choice", and the answer in HEAD will shortly
be "you get an error", but there seems no need to mention such
details here.)

Daniel Vérité

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cb7e1caf-3ea6-450d-af28-f524903a030c@manitou-mail.org
2018-11-14 16:29:57 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 1b5d797cd4 Lower lock level for renaming indexes
Change lock level for renaming index (either ALTER INDEX or implicitly
via some other commands) from AccessExclusiveLock to
ShareUpdateExclusiveLock.

One reason we need a strong lock for relation renaming is that the
name change causes a rebuild of the relcache entry.  Concurrent
sessions that have the relation open might not be able to handle the
relcache entry changing underneath them.  Therefore, we need to lock
the relation in a way that no one can have the relation open
concurrently.  But for indexes, the relcache handles reloads specially
in RelationReloadIndexInfo() in a way that keeps changes in the
relcache entry to a minimum.  As long as no one keeps pointers to
rd_amcache and rd_options around across possible relcache flushes,
which is the case, this ought to be safe.

We also want to use a self-exclusive lock for correctness, so that
concurrent DDL doesn't overwrite the rename if they start updating
while still seeing the old version.  Therefore, we use
ShareUpdateExclusiveLock, which is already used by other DDL commands
that want to operate in a concurrent manner.

The reason this is interesting at all is that renaming an index is a
typical part of a concurrent reindexing workflow (CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY new + DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY old + rename back).  And
indeed a future built-in REINDEX CONCURRENTLY might rely on the ability
to do concurrent renames as well.

Reviewed-by: Andrey Klychkov <aaklychkov@mail.ru>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1531767486.432607658@f357.i.mail.ru
2018-11-14 17:09:54 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut d20dceaf50 doc: Fix minor whitespace issue
Reported-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
2018-11-13 13:51:38 +01:00
Michael Paquier 319a810180 Fix dependency handling of partitions and inheritance for ON COMMIT
This commit fixes a set of issues with ON COMMIT actions when used on
partitioned tables and tables with inheritance children:
- Applying ON COMMIT DROP on a partitioned table with partitions or on a
table with inheritance children caused a failure at commit time, with
complains about the children being already dropped as all relations are
dropped one at the same time.
- Applying ON COMMIT DELETE on a partition relying on a partitioned
table which uses ON COMMIT DROP would cause the partition truncation to
fail as the parent is removed first.

The solution to the first problem is to handle the removal of all the
dependencies in one go instead of dropping relations one-by-one, based
on a suggestion from Álvaro Herrera.  So instead all the relation OIDs
to remove are gathered and then processed in one round of multiple
deletions.

The solution to the second problem is to reorder the actions, with
truncation happening first and relation drop done after.  Even if it
means that a partition could be first truncated, then immediately
dropped if its partitioned table is dropped, this has the merit to keep
the code simple as there is no need to do existence checks on the
relations to drop.

Contrary to a manual TRUNCATE on a partitioned table, ON COMMIT DELETE
does not cascade to its partitions.  The ON COMMIT action defined on
each partition gets the priority.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/68f17907-ec98-1192-f99f-8011400517f5@lab.ntt.co.jp
Backpatch-through: 10
2018-11-09 10:03:22 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 3a769d8239 pg_upgrade: Allow use of file cloning
Add another transfer mode --clone to pg_upgrade (besides the existing
--link and the default copy), using special file cloning calls.  This
makes the file transfer faster and more space efficient, achieving
speed similar to --link mode without the associated drawbacks.

On Linux, file cloning is supported on Btrfs and XFS (if formatted with
reflink support).  On macOS, file cloning is supported on APFS.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
2018-11-07 18:35:20 +01:00
Tom Lane 5d28c9bd73 Disable recheck_on_update optimization to avoid crashes.
The code added by commit c203d6cf8 causes a crash in at least one case,
where a potentially-optimizable expression index has a storage type
different from the input data type.  A cursory code review turned up
numerous other problems that seem impractical to fix on short notice.

Andres argued for revert of that patch some time ago, and if additional
senior committers had been paying attention, that's likely what would
have happened, but we were not :-(

At this point we can't just revert, at least not in v11, because that would
mean an ABI break for code touching relcache entries.  And we should not
remove the (also buggy) support for the recheck_on_update index reloption,
since it might already be used in some databases in the field.  So this
patch just does the as-little-invasive-as-possible measure of disabling
the feature as though recheck_on_update were forced off for all indexes.
I also removed the related regression tests (which would otherwise fail)
and the user-facing documentation of the reloption.

We should undertake a more thorough code cleanup if the patch can't be
fixed, but not under the extreme time pressure of being already overdue
for 11.1 release.

Per report from Ondřej Bouda and subsequent private discussion among
pgsql-release.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181106185255.776mstcyehnc63ty@alvherre.pgsql
2018-11-06 18:33:28 -05:00
Michael Paquier add9182e59 Reorganize format options of psql in alphabetical order
This makes the addition of new formats easier, and documentation lookups
easier.

Author: Daniel Vérité
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1803081004241.2916@lancre
2018-11-06 15:04:40 +09:00
Tom Lane 15c7293477 Fix bugs in plpgsql's handling of CALL argument lists.
exec_stmt_call() tried to extract information out of a CALL statement's
argument list without using expand_function_arguments(), apparently in
the hope of saving a few nanoseconds by not processing defaulted
arguments.  It got that quite wrong though, leading to crashes with
named arguments, as well as failure to enforce writability of the
argument for a defaulted INOUT parameter.  Fix and simplify the logic
by using expand_function_arguments() before examining the list.

Also, move the argument-examination to just after producing the CALL
command's plan, before invoking the called procedure.  This ensures
that we'll track possible changes in the procedure's argument list
correctly, and avoids a hazard of the plan cache being flushed while
the procedure executes.

Also fix assorted falsehoods and omissions in associated documentation.

Per bug #15477 from Alexey Stepanov.

Patch by me, with some help from Pavel Stehule.  Back-patch to v11.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15477-86075b1d1d319e0a@postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRA6UsujpTs9Sdwmk-R6yQykPx46wgjj+YZ7zxm4onrDyw@mail.gmail.com
2018-11-04 13:25:39 -05:00
Stephen Frost ceadcbe8ff Remove extra word from create sub docs
Improve the documentation in the CREATE SUBSCRIPTION command a bit by
removing an extraneous word and spelling out 'information'.
2018-11-03 12:21:54 -04:00
Magnus Hagander 56c0484b2e Fix missing whitespace in pg_dump ref page
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2018-10-29 12:34:49 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 5b75a4f826 pgbench: Report errors during run better
When an error occurs during a benchmark run, exit with a nonzero exit
code and write a message at the end.  Previously, it would just print
the error message when it happened but then proceed to print the run
summary normally and exit with status 0.  To still allow
distinguishing setup from run-time errors, we use exit status 2 for
the new state, whereas existing errors during pgbench initialization
use exit status 1.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2018-10-15 10:34:35 +02:00
Tom Lane 0027915143 Doc: copy-editing for CREATE INDEX reference page.
Justin Pryzby, Jonathan S. Katz, and myself.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181006134249.GD871@telsasoft.com
2018-10-13 16:42:58 -04:00
Thomas Munro 212fab9926 Relax transactional restrictions on ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE (redux).
Originally committed as 15bc038f (plus some follow-ups), this was
reverted in 28e07270 due to a problem discovered in parallel
workers.  This new version corrects that problem by sending the
list of uncommitted enum values to parallel workers.

Here follows the original commit message describing the change:

To prevent possibly breaking indexes on enum columns, we must keep
uncommitted enum values from getting stored in tables, unless we
can be sure that any such column is new in the current transaction.

Formerly, we enforced this by disallowing ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE
from being executed at all in a transaction block, unless the target
enum type had been created in the current transaction.  This patch
removes that restriction, and instead insists that an uncommitted enum
value can't be referenced unless it belongs to an enum type created
in the same transaction as the value.  Per discussion, this should be
a bit less onerous.  It does require each function that could possibly
return a new enum value to SQL operations to check this restriction,
but there aren't so many of those that this seems unmaintainable.

Author: Andrew Dunstan and Tom Lane, with parallel query fix by Thomas Munro
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0Ei7g6PaNTbcmAh9tCRahQrk%3Dr5ZWLD-jr7hXweYX3yg%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4075.1459088427%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-10-09 12:51:01 +13:00
Michael Paquier 803b1301e8 Add option SKIP_LOCKED to VACUUM and ANALYZE
When specified, this option allows VACUUM to skip the work on a relation
if there is a conflicting lock on it when trying to open it at the
beginning of its processing.

Similarly to autovacuum, this comes with a couple of limitations while
the relation is processed which can cause the process to still block:
- when opening the relation indexes.
- when acquiring row samples for table inheritance trees, partition trees
or certain types of foreign tables, and that a lock is taken on some
leaves of such trees.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9EF7EBE4-720D-4CF1-9D0E-4403D7E92990@amazon.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171201160907.27110.74730@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-10-04 09:00:33 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut a6949ca34d doc: Clarify CREATE TABLESPACE documentation
Be more specific about when and how to create the directory and what
permissions it should have.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5ca60e1a-26f9-89fd-e912-021dd2b8afe2%40gmail.com
2018-10-01 14:07:01 +02:00
Andres Freund 92a0342a90 Correct overflow handling in pgbench.
This patch attempts, although it's quite possible there are a few
holes, to properly detect and reported signed integer overflows in
pgbench.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171212052943.k2hlckfkeft3eiio@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-09-27 21:50:57 -07:00
Tom Lane 73a6005137 Doc: warn against using parallel restore with --load-via-partition-root.
This isn't terribly safe, and making it so doesn't seem like a small
project, so for the moment just warn against it.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/13624.1535486019@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-09-23 18:34:18 -04:00
Michael Paquier ce9cf8e7e6 Document lock taken on referenced table when adding a foreign key
This can happen for CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE, so a mention is added
to both of them in the concerned subsections.

Author: Adrien Nayrat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c4e8af11-1dfc-766a-c953-76979b9fcdaa@anayrat.info
2018-09-21 15:03:37 +09:00
Bruce Momjian da1db40435 doc: clarify pg_basebackup's -C/--create-slot description
The previous text was overly complex.

Backpatch-through: 11
2018-09-16 11:35:34 -04:00
Tom Lane 17b7c302b5 Fully enforce uniqueness of constraint names.
It's been true for a long time that we expect names of table and domain
constraints to be unique among the constraints of that table or domain.
However, the enforcement of that has been pretty haphazard, and it missed
some corner cases such as creating a CHECK constraint and then an index
constraint of the same name (as per recent report from André Hänsel).
Also, due to the lack of an actual unique index enforcing this, duplicates
could be created through race conditions.

Moreover, the code that searches pg_constraint has been quite inconsistent
about how to handle duplicate names if one did occur: some places checked
and threw errors if there was more than one match, while others just
processed the first match they came to.

To fix, create a unique index on (conrelid, contypid, conname).  Since
either conrelid or contypid is zero, this will separately enforce
uniqueness of constraint names among constraints of any one table and any
one domain.  (If we ever implement SQL assertions, and put them into this
catalog, more thought might be needed.  But it'd be at least as reasonable
to put them into a new catalog; having overloaded this one catalog with
two kinds of constraints was a mistake already IMO.)  This index can replace
the existing non-unique index on conrelid, though we need to keep the one
on contypid for query performance reasons.

Having done that, we can simplify the logic in various places that either
coped with duplicates or neglected to, as well as potentially improve
lookup performance when searching for a constraint by name.

Also, as per our usual practice, install a preliminary check so that you
get something more friendly than a unique-index violation report in the
case complained of by André.  And teach ChooseIndexName to avoid choosing
autogenerated names that would draw such a failure.

While it's not possible to make such a change in the back branches,
it doesn't seem quite too late to put this into v11, so do so.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0c1001d4428f$0942b430$1bc81c90$@webkr.de
2018-09-04 13:45:35 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov ec74369931 Implement "pg_ctl logrotate" command
Currently there are two ways to trigger log rotation in logging collector
process: call pg_rotate_logfile() SQL-function or send SIGUSR1 signal directly
to logging collector process.  However, it's nice to have more suitable way
for external tools to do that, which wouldn't require SQL connection or
knowledge of logging collector pid.  This commit implements triggering log
rotation by "pg_ctl logrotate" command.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180416.115435.28153375.horiguchi.kyotaro%40lab.ntt.co.jp
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Kuzmenkov, Alexander Korotkov
2018-09-01 19:46:49 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera a846e6d023 pg_verify_checksums: rename -d to --verbose
Using -d is odd, because we normally reserve that for a database
argument, so rename it to -v and add long version --verbose.

Also, reduce it to emit one line per file checked rather than one line
per block.

Per a complaint from Michael Banck.

Author: Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <michael.banck@credativ.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180827113411.GA22768@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2018-08-30 06:35:55 -03:00
Bruce Momjian cc2e457fe8 doc: "Latest checkpoint location" will not match in pg_upgrade
Mention that "Latest checkpoint location" will not match in pg_upgrade
if the standby server is still running during the upgrade, which is
possible.  "Match" text first appeared in PG 9.5.

Reported-by: Paul Bonaud

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c7268794-edb4-1772-3bfd-04c54585c24e@trainline.com

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2018-08-25 13:35:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 7abf8ee1e8 docs: Clarify pg_ctl initdb option text to match options proto.
The options string appeared in PG 10.

Reported-by: pgsql-kr@postgresql.kr

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/153500377658.1378.6587007319641704057@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-08-25 12:01:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 2d41d914ab Copy-editing of pg_verify_checksums help and ref page
Reformat synopsis, put options into better order, make the desciption
line a bit shorter, and put more details into the description.
2018-08-23 20:32:56 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 0a63f996e0 Change PROCEDURE to FUNCTION in CREATE TRIGGER syntax
Since procedures are now a different thing from functions, change the
CREATE TRIGGER and CREATE EVENT TRIGGER syntax to use FUNCTION in the
clause that specifies the function.  PROCEDURE is still accepted for
compatibility.

pg_dump and ruleutils.c output is not changed yet, because that would
require a change in information_schema.sql and thus a catversion change.

Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
2018-08-22 14:44:49 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut d12782898e Change PROCEDURE to FUNCTION in CREATE OPERATOR syntax
Since procedures are now a different thing from functions, change the
CREATE OPERATOR syntax to use FUNCTION in the clause that specifies the
function.  PROCEDURE is still accepted for compatibility.

Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
2018-08-22 14:44:49 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut b19495772e doc: Update uses of the word "procedure"
Historically, the term procedure was used as a synonym for function in
Postgres/PostgreSQL.  Now we have procedures as separate objects from
functions, so we need to clean up the documentation to not mix those
terms.

In particular, mentions of "trigger procedures" are changed to "trigger
functions", and access method "support procedures" are changed to
"support functions".  (The latter already used FUNCTION in the SQL
syntax anyway.)  Also, the terminology in the SPI chapter has been
cleaned up.

A few tests, examples, and code comments are also adjusted to be
consistent with documentation changes, but not everything.

Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
2018-08-22 14:44:49 +02:00
Michael Paquier ee80124811 Mention ownership requirements for REFRESH MATERIALIZED VIEW in docs
Author: Dian Fay
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/745abbd2-a1a0-ead8-2cb2-768c16747d97@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.3
2018-08-17 11:29:15 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera a5db27418e Add RECURSIVE to documentation index
Author: Daniel Vérité <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/76d905d7-7eb7-4574-b6ec-a0ca3a1523c0@manitou-mail.org
2018-08-09 16:19:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian b284262e40 docs: Only first instance of a PREPARE parameter sets data type
If the first reference to $1 is "($1 = col) or ($1 is null)", the data
type can be determined, but not for "($1 is null) or ($1 = col)".  This
change documents this.

Reported-by: Morgan Owens

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/153233728858.1404.15268121695358514937@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.3
2018-08-09 10:13:15 -04:00
Michael Paquier 661dd23950 Restrict access to reindex of shared catalogs for non-privileged users
A database owner running a database-level REINDEX has the possibility to
also do the operation on shared system catalogs without being an owner
of them, which allows him to block resources it should not have access
to.  The same goes for a schema owner.  For example, PostgreSQL would go
unresponsive and even block authentication if a lock is waited for
pg_authid.  This commit makes sure that a user running a REINDEX SYSTEM,
DATABASE or SCHEMA only works on the following relations:
- The user is a superuser
- The user is the table owner
- The user is the database/schema owner, only if the relation worked on
is not shared.

Robert has worded most the documentation changes, and I have coded the
core part.

Reported-by: Lloyd Albin, Jeremy Schneider
Author: Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Reviewed by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152512087100.19803.12733865831237526317@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180805211059.GA2185@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 11- as the current behavior has been around for a
very long time and could be disruptive for already released branches.
2018-08-09 09:40:15 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 70de0abdb7 doc: Improve CREATE COLLATION locking documentation
Move out of the concurrency control chapter, where mostly only user
table locks are discussed, and move to CREATE COLLATION reference page.

Author: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Author: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
2018-07-30 22:09:48 +02:00
Noah Misch e09144e6ce Document security implications of qualified names.
Commit 5770172cb0 documented secure schema
usage, and that advice suffices for using unqualified names securely.
Document, in typeconv-func primarily, the additional issues that arise
with qualified names.  Back-patch to 9.3 (all supported versions).

Reviewed by Jonathan S. Katz.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180721012446.GA1840594@rfd.leadboat.com
2018-07-28 20:08:01 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut fb421231da psql: Add option for procedures to \df 2018-07-24 11:38:53 +02:00
Tom Lane 701fd0bbc9 Drop the rule against included index columns duplicating key columns.
The initial version of the included-index-column feature stated that
included columns couldn't be the same as any key column of the index.
While it'd be pretty silly to do that, since the included column would be
entirely redundant, we've never prohibited redundant index columns before
so it's not very consistent to do so here.  Moreover, the prohibition
was itself badly implemented, so that it failed to reject columns that
were effectively identical but not spelled quite alike, as reported by
Aditya Toshniwal.

(Moreover, it's not hard to imagine that for some non-btree index types,
such cases would be non-silly anyhow: the index might use a lossy
representation for key columns but be able to support retrieval of the
original form of included columns.)

Hence, let's just drop the prohibition.

In passing, do some copy-editing on the documentation for the
included-column feature.

Yugo Nagata; documentation and test corrections by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAM9w-_mhBCys4fQNfaiQKTRrVWtoFrZ-wXmDuE9Nj5y-Y7aDKQ@mail.gmail.com
2018-07-18 14:43:03 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera c6736ff760 doc: move PARTITION OF stanza to just below PARTITION BY
It's more logical this way, since the new ordering matches the way the
tables are created; but in any case, the previous location of PARTITION OF
did not appear carefully chosen anyway (since it didn't match the
location in which it appears in the synopsys either, which is what we
normally do.)

In the PARTITION BY stanza, add a link to the partitioning section in
the DDL chapter, too.

Suggested-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
2018-07-17 00:54:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 3884072329 Prohibit transaction commands in security definer procedures
Starting and aborting transactions in security definer procedures
doesn't work.  StartTransaction() insists that the security context
stack is empty, so this would currently cause a crash, and
AbortTransaction() resets it.  This could be made to work by
reorganizing the code, but right now we just prohibit it.

Reported-by: amul sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b96Gupt_LFL7uNyy3c50-wbhA68NUjiK5%3DrF6_w%3Dpq_T%3DQ%40mail.gmail.com
2018-07-13 10:41:32 +02:00
Thomas Munro 387a5cfb94 Add pg_dump --on-conflict-do-nothing option.
When dumping INSERT statements, optionally add ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING.

Author: Surafel Temesgen
Reviewed-by: Takeshi Ideriha, Nico Williams, Dilip Kumar
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q-PQ9cOEzs2%2BQHK5ObfF_4QbmBaYXbZx6BGGN66Q-n8FA%40mail.gmail.com
2018-07-13 13:57:03 +12:00
Tom Lane 632b4ae92d Doc: minor improvement in pl/pgsql FETCH/MOVE documentation.
Explain that you can use any integer expression for the "count" in
pl/pgsql's versions of FETCH/MOVE, unlike the SQL versions which only
allow a constant.

Remove the duplicate version of this para under MOVE.  I don't see
a good reason to maintain two identical paras when we just said that
MOVE works exactly like FETCH.

Per Pavel Stehule, though I didn't use his text.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRAcvSXcNdUGx43bOK1e3NNPbQny7neoTLN42af+8MYWEA@mail.gmail.com
2018-07-12 12:29:03 -04:00
Tom Lane e0cd0ea4f9 Doc: update documentation for requirement of ORDER BY in GROUPS mode.
Commit ff4f88916 adjusted the code to enforce the SQL spec's requirement
that a window using GROUPS mode must have an ORDER BY clause.  But I missed
that the documentation explicitly said you didn't have to have one.

Also minor wordsmithing in the window-function section of select.sgml.

Per Masahiko Sawada, though I didn't use his patch.
2018-07-12 11:10:24 -04:00
Michael Paquier 8a00b96aa9 Add pg_rewind --no-sync
This is an option consistent with what pg_dump and pg_basebackup provide
which is useful for leveraging the I/O effort when testing things, not
to be used in a production environment.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180325122607.GB3707@paquier.xyz
2018-07-10 08:51:10 +09:00
Michael Paquier eb270b00b2 Add note in pg_rewind documentation about read-only files
When performing pg_rewind, the presence of a read-only file which is not
accessible for writes will cause a failure while processing.  This can
cause the control file of the target data folder to be truncated,
causing it to not be reusable with a successive run.

Also, when pg_rewind fails mid-flight, there is likely no way to be able
to recover the target data folder anyway, in which case a new base
backup is the best option.  A note is added in the documentation as
well about.

Reported-by: Christian H.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180104200633.17004.16377%40wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-07-07 08:10:10 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut b46727e07a doc: Reorganize CREATE TABLE / LIKE option documentation
This section once started out small but has now grown quite a bit and
needs a bit of structure.

Rewrite as list, add documentation of EXCLUDING, and improve the
documentation of INCLUDING ALL instead of just listing all the options
again.

per report from Yugo Nagata that EXCLUDING was not documented, that part
reviewed by Daniel Gustafsson, most of the rewrite was by me
2018-07-04 10:45:15 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut f7481d2c3c Documentation spell checking and markup improvements 2018-06-29 21:26:41 +02:00
Michael Paquier c672d709b0 Fix description and documentation related to pg_restore --no-comments
These descriptions have been referring to object dump, but a restore
operation is done.

Reported-by: Andrey Lizenko
Author: Andrey Lizenko
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152992021588.1268.16786093506650391435@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-06-26 14:57:53 +09:00
Magnus Hagander d9443d9608 Fix a number of typos
Author: Liudmila Mantrova <l.mantrova@postgrespro.ru>
2018-06-20 16:01:18 +02:00
Magnus Hagander 741ee9dc81 Support long option for --pgdata in pg_verify_checksums
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2018-06-20 14:33:48 +02:00
Magnus Hagander d73300a286 Document the -D and $PGDATA switch/env for pg_verify_checksums
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2018-06-20 14:32:51 +02:00
Michael Paquier c83e202990 Fix grammar in REVOKE documentation
Reported-by: Erwin Brandstetter
2018-06-10 22:44:17 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 5efbdd36f1 doc: Move some new options into better positions on man pages 2018-06-07 23:36:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 3b9b7516f4 ecpg: Document new compatibility option
It's listed in --help, so it should be listed in the man page as well.
2018-06-07 23:33:24 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 4d6a854f17 Put new command-line options into alphabetical order 2018-06-04 15:03:15 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 99164e6952 doc: adjust DECLARE docs to mention FOR UPDATE behavior
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8dc63ba7-dc56-fc7c-fc16-4fae03e3bfe6@2ndquadrant.com

Author: Peter Eisentraut, Tom Lane, me

Backpatch-through: 9.3
2018-05-28 13:16:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut f037de6aeb doc: Fix some trailing whitespace 2018-05-21 14:49:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 477d243b0f doc: Whitespace fixes in man pages 2018-05-21 14:43:24 -04:00
Andrew Gierth 1da162e1f5 Fix SQL:2008 FETCH FIRST syntax to allow parameters.
OFFSET <x> ROWS FETCH FIRST <y> ROWS ONLY syntax is supposed to accept
<simple value specification>, which includes parameters as well as
literals. When this syntax was added all those years ago, it was done
inconsistently, with <x> and <y> being different subsets of the
standard syntax.

Rectify that by making <x> and <y> accept the same thing, and allowing
either a (signed) numeric literal or a c_expr there, which allows for
parameters, variables, and parenthesized arbitrary expressions.

Per bug #15200 from Lukas Eder.

Backpatch all the way, since this has been broken from the start.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/877enz476l.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/152647780335.27204.16895288237122418685@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-05-21 17:27:08 +01:00
Tom Lane f755a152d4 Improve spelling of new FINALFUNC_MODIFY aggregate attribute.
I'd used SHARABLE as a value originally, but Peter Eisentraut points out
that dictionaries agree that SHAREABLE is the preferred spelling.
Run around and change that before it's too late.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d2e1afd4-659c-50d6-1b20-7cfd3675e909@2ndquadrant.com
2018-05-21 11:41:42 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 3ce7f72529 pg_basebackup: Remove short option -k
-k meant --no-verify-checksums, which is the opposite of what initdb
uses -k for.  After discussion, a short option does not seem necessary,
so just keep the long option.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d510f8aa-19e1-d06e-7630-ad27f7441d68%402ndquadrant.com
2018-05-21 10:01:49 -04:00
Robert Haas f955d7ee16 Documentation updates for partitioning.
Takayuki Tsunakawa

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1F965627@G01JPEXMBYT05
2018-05-07 09:48:47 -04:00
Tom Lane 2e83e6bd74 Adjust hints and docs to suggest CREATE EXTENSION not CREATE LANGUAGE.
The core PLs have been extension-ified for seven years now, and we can
reasonably hope that all out-of-core PLs have been too.  So adjust a few
places that were still recommending CREATE LANGUAGE as the user-level
way to install a PL.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaJTUDMSuSCg4k08Dv8vhbrJq9nP3ZfPbmysVz_616qxw@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-27 13:42:03 -04:00
Tom Lane 4df58f7ed7 Fix handling of partition bounds for boolean partitioning columns.
Previously, you could partition by a boolean column as long as you
spelled the bound values as string literals, for instance FOR VALUES
IN ('t').  The trouble with this is that ruleutils.c printed that as
FOR VALUES IN (TRUE), which is reasonable syntax but wasn't accepted by
the grammar.  That results in dump-and-reload failures for such cases.

Apply a minimal fix that just causes TRUE and FALSE to be converted to
strings 'true' and 'false'.  This is pretty grotty, but it's too late for
a more principled fix in v11 (to say nothing of v10).  We should revisit
the whole issue of how partition bound values are parsed for v12.

Amit Langote

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e05c5162-1103-7e37-d1ab-6de3e0afaf70@lab.ntt.co.jp
2018-04-23 15:29:11 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas fe7fc52645 Improve docs for the new INCLUDE directive in CREATE/ALTER TABLE.
Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20180411082020.GD19732%40paquier.xyz
2018-04-18 05:45:32 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii 03030512d1 Add more infinite recursion detection while locking a view.
Also add regression test cases for detecting infinite recursion in
locking view tests.  Some document enhancements. Patch by Yugo Nagata.
2018-04-17 16:59:17 +09:00
Magnus Hagander 90372729f4 Fix build of pg_verify_checksum docs
They were accidentally excluded when reverting the backend online
checksum functionality, and since they weren't built the incorrect
reference to a removed section also did not trigger a problem.

Author: Christoph Berg
2018-04-15 13:57:02 +02:00
Magnus Hagander 645387927f Clarify pg_verify_checksum documentation
Make it clear that a cluster has to be shut down cleanly before
pg_verify_checksum can be run against it.

Author: Michael Paquier
Review: Daniel Gustafsson
2018-04-15 13:52:57 +02:00
Magnus Hagander 44e2df461f Remove -f option from pg_verify_checksums
This option makes no sense when the cluster checksum state cannot be
changed, and should have been removed in the revert.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Review: Michael Paquier
2018-04-15 13:52:48 +02:00
Simon Riggs 08ea7a2291 Revert MERGE patch
This reverts commits d204ef6377,
83454e3c2b and a few more commits thereafter
(complete list at the end) related to MERGE feature.

While the feature was fully functional, with sufficient test coverage and
necessary documentation, it was felt that some parts of the executor and
parse-analyzer can use a different design and it wasn't possible to do that in
the available time. So it was decided to revert the patch for PG11 and retry
again in the future.

Thanks again to all reviewers and bug reporters.

List of commits reverted, in reverse chronological order:

 f1464c5380 Improve parse representation for MERGE
 ddb4158579 MERGE syntax diagram correction
 530e69e59b Allow cpluspluscheck to pass by renaming variable
 01b88b4df5 MERGE minor errata
 3af7b2b0d4 MERGE fix variable warning in non-assert builds
 a5d86181ec MERGE INSERT allows only one VALUES clause
 4b2d44031f MERGE post-commit review
 4923550c20 Tab completion for MERGE
 aa3faa3c7a WITH support in MERGE
 83454e3c2b New files for MERGE
 d204ef6377 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016

Author: Pavan Deolasee
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
2018-04-12 11:22:56 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 036ca6f7bb doc: Fix typos in pgbench documentation
Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Reviewed-by: Edmund Horner <ejrh00@gmail.com>
2018-04-11 08:34:30 -04:00
Magnus Hagander a228cc13ae Revert "Allow on-line enabling and disabling of data checksums"
This reverts the backend sides of commit 1fde38beaa.
I have, at least for now, left the pg_verify_checksums tool in place, as
this tool can be very valuable without the rest of the patch as well,
and since it's a read-only tool that only runs when the cluster is down
it should be a lot safer.
2018-04-09 19:03:42 +02:00
Stephen Frost c37b3d08ca Allow group access on PGDATA
Allow the cluster to be optionally init'd with read access for the
group.

This means a relatively non-privileged user can perform a backup of the
cluster without requiring write privileges, which enhances security.

The mode of PGDATA is used to determine whether group permissions are
enabled for directory and file creates.  This method was chosen as it's
simple and works well for the various utilities that write into PGDATA.

Changing the mode of PGDATA manually will not automatically change the
mode of all the files contained therein.  If the user would like to
enable group access on an existing cluster then changing the mode of all
the existing files will be required.  Note that pg_upgrade will
automatically change the mode of all migrated files if the new cluster
is init'd with the -g option.

Tests are included for the backend and all the utilities which operate
on the PG data directory to ensure that the correct mode is set based on
the data directory permissions.

Author: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, with discussion amongst many others.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad346fe6-b23e-59f1-ecb7-0e08390ad629%40pgmasters.net
2018-04-07 17:45:39 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev 8224de4f42 Indexes with INCLUDE columns and their support in B-tree
This patch introduces INCLUDE clause to index definition.  This clause
specifies a list of columns which will be included as a non-key part in
the index.  The INCLUDE columns exist solely to allow more queries to
benefit from index-only scans.  Also, such columns don't need to have
appropriate operator classes.  Expressions are not supported as INCLUDE
columns since they cannot be used in index-only scans.

Index access methods supporting INCLUDE are indicated by amcaninclude flag
in IndexAmRoutine.  For now, only B-tree indexes support INCLUDE clause.

In B-tree indexes INCLUDE columns are truncated from pivot index tuples
(tuples located in non-leaf pages and high keys).  Therefore, B-tree indexes
now might have variable number of attributes.  This patch also provides
generic facility to support that: pivot tuples contain number of their
attributes in t_tid.ip_posid.  Free 13th bit of t_info is used for indicating
that.  This facility will simplify further support of index suffix truncation.
The changes of above are backward-compatible, pg_upgrade doesn't need special
handling of B-tree indexes for that.

Bump catalog version

Author: Anastasia Lubennikova with contribition by Alexander Korotkov and me
Reviewed by: Peter Geoghegan, Tomas Vondra, Antonin Houska, Jeff Janes,
			 David Rowley, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/56168952.4010101@postgrespro.ru
2018-04-07 23:00:39 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut 039eb6e92f Logical replication support for TRUNCATE
Update the built-in logical replication system to make use of the
previously added logical decoding for TRUNCATE support.  Add the
required truncate callback to pgoutput and a new logical replication
protocol message.

Publications get a new attribute to determine whether to replicate
truncate actions.  When updating a publication via pg_dump from an older
version, this is not set, thus preserving the previous behavior.

Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Marco Nenciarini <marco.nenciarini@2ndquadrant.it>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
2018-04-07 11:34:11 -04:00
Robert Haas 3d956d9562 Allow insert and update tuple routing and COPY for foreign tables.
Also enable this for postgres_fdw.

Etsuro Fujita, based on an earlier patch by Amit Langote. The larger
patch series of which this is a part has been reviewed by Amit
Langote, David Fetter, Maksim Milyutin, Álvaro Herrera, Stephen Frost,
and me.  Minor documentation changes to the final version by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/29906a26-da12-8c86-4fb9-d8f88442f2b9@lab.ntt.co.jp
2018-04-06 19:22:03 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 3cabe38630 Fix badly edited doc sentence
Noted by Vik Fearing and Robert Haas
2018-04-06 17:41:44 -03:00
Stephen Frost 0fdc8495bf Add default roles for file/program access
This patch adds new default roles named 'pg_read_server_files',
'pg_write_server_files', 'pg_execute_server_program' which
allow an administrator to GRANT to a non-superuser role the ability to
access server-side files or run programs through PostgreSQL (as the user
the database is running as).  Having one of these roles allows a
non-superuser to use server-side COPY to read, write, or with a program,
and to use file_fdw (if installed by a superuser and GRANT'd USAGE on
it) to read from files or run a program.

The existing misc file functions are also changed to allow a user with
the 'pg_read_server_files' default role to read any files on the
filesystem, matching the privileges given to that role through COPY and
file_fdw from above.

Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171231191939.GR2416%40tamriel.snowman.net
2018-04-06 14:47:10 -04:00
Magnus Hagander 1fde38beaa Allow on-line enabling and disabling of data checksums
This makes it possible to turn checksums on in a live cluster, without
the previous need for dump/reload or logical replication (and to turn it
off).

Enabling checkusm starts a background process in the form of a
launcher/worker combination that goes through the entire database and
recalculates checksums on each and every page. Only when all pages have
been checksummed are they fully enabled in the cluster. Any failure of
the process will revert to checksums off and the process has to be
started.

This adds a new WAL record that indicates the state of checksums, so
the process works across replicated clusters.

Authors: Magnus Hagander and Daniel Gustafsson
Review: Tomas Vondra, Michael Banck, Heikki Linnakangas, Andrey Borodin
2018-04-05 22:04:48 +02:00
Simon Riggs ddb4158579 MERGE syntax diagram correction
Reported-by: Andrew Gierth
2018-04-05 20:36:23 +01:00
Simon Riggs a5d86181ec MERGE INSERT allows only one VALUES clause
Doc syntax and brief mention of restriction
2018-04-05 12:03:42 +01:00
Teodor Sigaev a02d51c0d3 Fix misprint in documentation
Masahiko Sawada
2018-04-05 13:06:05 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera 3de241dba8 Foreign keys on partitioned tables
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171231194359.cvojcour423ulha4@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
2018-04-04 14:02:49 -03:00
Teodor Sigaev 857f9c36cd Skip full index scan during cleanup of B-tree indexes when possible
Vacuum of index consists from two stages: multiple (zero of more) ambulkdelete
calls and one amvacuumcleanup call. When workload on particular table
is append-only, then autovacuum isn't intended to touch this table. However,
user may run vacuum manually in order to fill visibility map and get benefits
of index-only scans. Then ambulkdelete wouldn't be called for indexes
of such table (because no heap tuples were deleted), only amvacuumcleanup would
be called In this case, amvacuumcleanup would perform full index scan for
two objectives: put recyclable pages into free space map and update index
statistics.

This patch allows btvacuumclanup to skip full index scan when two conditions
are satisfied: no pages are going to be put into free space map and index
statistics isn't stalled. In order to check first condition, we store
oldest btpo_xact in the meta-page. When it's precedes RecentGlobalXmin, then
there are some recyclable pages. In order to check second condition we store
number of heap tuples observed during previous full index scan by cleanup.
If fraction of newly inserted tuples is less than
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor, then statistics isn't considered to be
stalled. vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor can be defined as both reloption and GUC (default).

This patch bumps B-tree meta-page version. Upgrade of meta-page is performed
"on the fly": during VACUUM meta-page is rewritten with new version. No special
handling in pg_upgrade is required.

Author: Masahiko Sawada, Alexander Korotkov
Review by: Peter Geoghegan, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Korotkov, Yura Sokolov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAD21AoAX+d2oD_nrd9O2YkpzHaFr=uQeGr9s1rKC3O4ENc568g@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-04 19:29:00 +03:00
Magnus Hagander 4eb77d50c2 Validate page level checksums in base backups
When base backups are run over the replication protocol (for example
using pg_basebackup), verify the checksums of all data blocks if
checksums are enabled. If checksum failures are encountered, log them
as warnings but don't abort the backup.

This becomes the default behaviour in pg_basebackup (provided checksums
are enabled on the server), so add a switch (-k) to disable the checks
if necessary.

Author: Michael Banck
Reviewed-By: Magnus Hagander, David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180228180856.GE13784@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2018-04-03 13:47:16 +02:00
Simon Riggs aa3faa3c7a WITH support in MERGE
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Recursive support removed, no tests
Docs added by me
2018-04-03 12:13:59 +01:00
Simon Riggs 83454e3c2b New files for MERGE 2018-04-03 10:22:21 +01:00
Simon Riggs d204ef6377 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table
using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL
statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows
a task that would other require multiple PL statements.
e.g.

MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
  UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
  DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
  INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
  DO NOTHING;

MERGE works with regular and partitioned tables, including
column and row security enforcement, as well as support for
row, statement and transition triggers.

MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though
also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended
to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands
for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead.
MERGE can be used statically from PL/pgSQL.

MERGE does not yet support inheritance, write rules,
RETURNING clauses, updatable views or foreign tables.
MERGE follows SQL Standard per the most recent SQL:2016.

Includes full tests and documentation, including full
isolation tests to demonstrate the concurrent behavior.

This version written from scratch in 2017 by Simon Riggs,
using docs and tests originally written in 2009. Later work
from Pavan Deolasee has been both complex and deep, leaving
the lead author credit now in his hands.
Extensive discussion of concurrency from Peter Geoghegan,
with thanks for the time and effort contributed.

Various issues reported via sqlsmith by Andreas Seltenreich

Authors: Pavan Deolasee, Simon Riggs
Reviewer: Peter Geoghegan, Amit Langote, Tomas Vondra, Simon Riggs

Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com
https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-03 09:28:16 +01:00
Simon Riggs aa5877bb26 Revert "MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016"
This reverts commit e6597dc353.
2018-04-02 21:36:38 +01:00
Simon Riggs 7cf8a5c302 Revert "Modified files for MERGE"
This reverts commit 354f13855e.
2018-04-02 21:34:15 +01:00
Simon Riggs 354f13855e Modified files for MERGE 2018-04-02 21:12:47 +01:00
Simon Riggs e6597dc353 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table
using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL
statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows
a task that would other require multiple PL statements.
e.g.

MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
  UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
  DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
  INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
  DO NOTHING;

MERGE works with regular and partitioned tables, including
column and row security enforcement, as well as support for
row, statement and transition triggers.

MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though
also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended
to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands
for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead.
MERGE can be used statically from PL/pgSQL.

MERGE does not yet support inheritance, write rules,
RETURNING clauses, updatable views or foreign tables.
MERGE follows SQL Standard per the most recent SQL:2016.

Includes full tests and documentation, including full
isolation tests to demonstrate the concurrent behavior.

This version written from scratch in 2017 by Simon Riggs,
using docs and tests originally written in 2009. Later work
from Pavan Deolasee has been both complex and deep, leaving
the lead author credit now in his hands.
Extensive discussion of concurrency from Peter Geoghegan,
with thanks for the time and effort contributed.

Various issues reported via sqlsmith by Andreas Seltenreich

Authors: Pavan Deolasee, Simon Riggs
Reviewers: Peter Geoghegan, Amit Langote, Tomas Vondra, Simon Riggs

Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com
https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-02 21:04:35 +01:00
Bruce Momjian 3da7502cd0 docs: fix spacing around "if not exists" brackets
Reported-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFcNs+qDD+QKcF8YCPQnjAxoWN61qY_YdFLB3iQqbWCLSCyY0g@mail.gmail.com

Author: Fabrízio de Royes Mello
2018-03-29 21:25:39 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii 34c20de4d0 Allow to lock views.
Now all tables used in view definitions can be recursively locked by a
LOCK command.

Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed by Robert Haas, Thomas Munro and me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171011183629.eb2817b3.nagata%40sraoss.co.jp
2018-03-30 09:18:02 +09:00
Fujii Masao 266b6acb31 Make pg_rewind skip files and directories that are removed during server start.
The target cluster that was rewound needs to perform recovery from
the checkpoint created at failover, which leads it to remove or recreate
some files and directories that may have been copied from the source
cluster. So pg_rewind can skip synchronizing such files and directories,
and which reduces the amount of data transferred during a rewind
without changing the usefulness of the operation.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Stephen Frost and me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180205071022.GA17337@paquier.xyz
2018-03-29 04:56:52 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan 16828d5c02 Fast ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN with a non-NULL default
Currently adding a column to a table with a non-NULL default results in
a rewrite of the table. For large tables this can be both expensive and
disruptive. This patch removes the need for the rewrite as long as the
default value is not volatile. The default expression is evaluated at
the time of the ALTER TABLE and the result stored in a new column
(attmissingval) in pg_attribute, and a new column (atthasmissing) is set
to true. Any existing row when fetched will be supplied with the
attmissingval. New rows will have the supplied value or the default and
so will never need the attmissingval.

Any time the table is rewritten all the atthasmissing and attmissingval
settings for the attributes are cleared, as they are no longer needed.

The most visible code change from this is in heap_attisnull, which
acquires a third TupleDesc argument, allowing it to detect a missing
value if there is one. In many cases where it is known that there will
not be any (e.g.  catalog relations) NULL can be passed for this
argument.

Andrew Dunstan, heavily modified from an original patch from Serge
Rielau.
Reviewed by Tom Lane, Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra and David Rowley.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/31e2e921-7002-4c27-59f5-51f08404c858@2ndQuadrant.com
2018-03-28 10:43:52 +10:30
Simon Riggs c203d6cf81 Allow HOT updates for some expression indexes
If the value of an index expression is unchanged after UPDATE,
allow HOT updates where previously we disallowed them, giving
a significant performance boost in those cases.

Particularly useful for indexes such as JSON->>field where the
JSON value changes but the indexed value does not.

Submitted as "surjective indexes" patch, now enabled by use
of new "recheck_on_update" parameter.

Author: Konstantin Knizhnik
Reviewer: Simon Riggs, with much wordsmithing and some cleanup
2018-03-27 19:57:02 +01:00
Teodor Sigaev 64f85894ad Set random seed for pgbench.
Setting random could increase reproducibility of test in some cases. Patch
suggests three providers for seed: time (default), strong random
generator (if available) and unsigned constant. Seed could be set from
command line or enviroment variable.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed by: Chapman Flack
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20160407082711.q7iq3ykffqxcszkv@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-26 18:26:27 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera 555ee77a96 Handle INSERT .. ON CONFLICT with partitioned tables
Commit eb7ed3f306 enabled unique constraints on partitioned tables,
but one thing that was not working properly is INSERT/ON CONFLICT.
This commit introduces a new node keeps state related to the ON CONFLICT
clause per partition, and fills it when that partition is about to be
used for tuple routing.

Author: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Etsuro Fujita, Pavan Deolasee
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180228004602.cwdyralmg5ejdqkq@alvherre.pgsql
2018-03-26 10:43:54 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut bf4a8676c3 pg_resetwal: Allow users to change the WAL segment size
This adds a new option --wal-segsize (analogous to initdb) that changes
the WAL segment size in pg_control.

Author: Nathan Bossart <bossartn@amazon.com>
2018-03-25 14:58:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 8ad8d916f9 initdb: Further polishing of --wal-segsize option
Extend documentation.  Improve option parsing in case no argument was
specified.
2018-03-25 14:58:21 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut e22b27f0cb Add long options to pg_resetwal and pg_controldata
We were running out of good single-letter options for some upcoming
pg_resetwal functionality, so add long options to create more
possibilities.  Add to pg_controldata as well for symmetry.

based on patch by Bossart, Nathan <bossartn@amazon.com>
2018-03-24 21:49:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 4644a1170f Improve pg_resetwal documentation
Clarify that the -l option takes a file name, not an "address", and that
that might be different from the LSN if nondefault WAL segment sizes are
used.
2018-03-24 15:38:57 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 86f575948c Allow FOR EACH ROW triggers on partitioned tables
Previously, FOR EACH ROW triggers were not allowed in partitioned
tables.  Now we allow AFTER triggers on them, and on trigger creation we
cascade to create an identical trigger in each partition.  We also clone
the triggers to each partition that is created or attached later.

This means that deferred unique keys are allowed on partitioned tables,
too.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Simon Riggs, Amit Langote, Robert Haas,
	Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171229225319.ajltgss2ojkfd3kp@alvherre.pgsql
2018-03-23 10:48:22 -03:00
Teodor Sigaev f67b113ac6 Add \if support to pgbench
Patch adds \if to pgbench as it done for psql. Implementation shares condition
stack code with psql, so, this code is moved to fe_utils directory.

Author: Fabien COELHO with minor editorization by me
Review by: Vik Fearing, Fedor Sigaev
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/alpine.DEB.2.20.1711252200190.28523@lancre
2018-03-22 17:42:03 +03:00
Teodor Sigaev e51a04840a Add general purpose hasing functions to pgbench.
Hashing function is useful for simulating real-world workload in test like
WEB workload, as an example - YCSB benchmarks.

Author: Ildar Musin with minor editorization by me
Reviewed by: Fabien Coelho, me
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/0e8bd39e-dfcd-2879-f88f-272799ad7ef2@postgrespro.ru
2018-03-21 18:01:23 +03:00
Tom Lane a467832047 Doc: note that statement-level view triggers require an INSTEAD OF trigger.
If a view lacks an INSTEAD OF trigger, DML on it can only work by rewriting
the command into a command on the underlying base table(s).  Then we will
fire triggers attached to those table(s), not those for the view.  This
seems appropriate from a consistency standpoint, but nowhere was the
behavior explicitly documented, so let's do that.

There was some discussion of throwing an error or warning if a statement
trigger is created on a view without creating a row INSTEAD OF trigger.
But a simple implementation of that would result in dump/restore ordering
hazards.  Given that it's been like this all along, and we hadn't heard
a complaint till now, a documentation improvement seems sufficient.

Per bug #15106 from Pu Qun.  Back-patch to all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152083391168.1215.16892140713507052796@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-03-18 15:10:28 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 33803f67f1 Support INOUT arguments in procedures
In a top-level CALL, the values of INOUT arguments will be returned as a
result row.  In PL/pgSQL, the values are assigned back to the input
arguments.  In other languages, the same convention as for return a
record from a function is used.  That does not require any code changes
in the PL implementations.

Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
2018-03-14 12:07:28 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 63cbee6a78 doc: Reword restriction on partition keys in unique indexes
New wording from David G. Johnston, who noticed the unreadable original
also.  Include his suggested test case as well.

Fix a typo I noticed elsewhere while doing this.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
2018-03-12 13:32:28 -03:00
Andres Freund 854dd8cff5 Add parenthesized options syntax for ANALYZE.
This is analogous to the syntax allowed for VACUUM. This allows us to
avoid making new options reserved keywords and makes it easier to
allow arbitrary argument order. Oh, and it's consistent with the other
commands, too.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/D3FC73E2-9B1A-4DB4-8180-55F57D116B4E@amazon.com
2018-03-05 16:21:05 -08:00
Alvaro Herrera 5564c11815 Clone extended stats in CREATE TABLE (LIKE INCLUDING ALL)
The LIKE INCLUDING ALL clause to CREATE TABLE intuitively indicates
cloning of extended statistics on the source table, but it failed to do
so.  Patch it up so that it does.  Also include an INCLUDING STATISTICS
option to the LIKE clause, so that the behavior can be requested
individually, or excluded individually.

While at it, reorder the INCLUDING options, both in code and in docs, in
alphabetical order which makes more sense than feature-implementation
order that was previously used.

Backpatch this to Postgres 10, where extended statistics were
introduced, because this is seen as an oversight in a fresh feature
which is better to get consistent from the get-go instead of changing
only in pg11.

In pg11, comments on statistics objects are cloned too.  In pg10 they
are not, because I (Álvaro) was too coward to change the parse node as
required to support it.  Also, in pg10 I chose not to renumber the
parser symbols for the various INCLUDING options in LIKE, for the same
reason.  Any corresponding user-visible changes (docs) are backpatched,
though.

Reported-by: Stephen Froehlich
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CY1PR0601MB1927315B45667A1B679D0FD5E5EF0@CY1PR0601MB1927.namprd06.prod.outlook.com
2018-03-05 19:37:19 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut dd9ed0bf70 doc: Tiny whitespace fix 2018-03-05 11:27:08 -05:00
Andres Freund 8c438fcc9f doc: Add random_zipfian to list of random functions with argument.
Author: Ildar Musin
Reviewed-By: Fabian Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6376ed81-3ce8-14f4-4758-099872f4ce7d@postgrespro.ru
2018-03-01 01:40:00 -08:00
Peter Eisentraut d21ddc220f Fix warnings in man page build
The changes in the CREATE POLICY man page from commit
87c2a17fee triggered a stylesheet bug that
created some warning messages and incorrect output.  This installs a
workaround.

Also improve the whitespace a bit so it looks better.
2018-02-28 08:22:51 -05:00
Noah Misch 5770172cb0 Document security implications of search_path and the public schema.
The ability to create like-named objects in different schemas opens up
the potential for users to change the behavior of other users' queries,
maliciously or accidentally.  When you connect to a PostgreSQL server,
you should remove from your search_path any schema for which a user
other than yourself or superusers holds the CREATE privilege.  If you do
not, other users holding CREATE privilege can redefine the behavior of
your commands, causing them to perform arbitrary SQL statements under
your identity.  "SET search_path = ..." and "SELECT
pg_catalog.set_config(...)" are not vulnerable to such hijacking, so one
can use either as the first command of a session.  As special
exceptions, the following client applications behave as documented
regardless of search_path settings and schema privileges: clusterdb
createdb createlang createuser dropdb droplang dropuser ecpg (not
programs it generates) initdb oid2name pg_archivecleanup pg_basebackup
pg_config pg_controldata pg_ctl pg_dump pg_dumpall pg_isready
pg_receivewal pg_recvlogical pg_resetwal pg_restore pg_rewind pg_standby
pg_test_fsync pg_test_timing pg_upgrade pg_waldump reindexdb vacuumdb
vacuumlo.  Not included are core client programs that run user-specified
SQL commands, namely psql and pgbench.  PostgreSQL encourages non-core
client applications to do likewise.

Document this in the context of libpq connections, psql connections,
dblink connections, ECPG connections, extension packaging, and schema
usage patterns.  The principal defense for applications is "SELECT
pg_catalog.set_config('search_path', '', false)", and the principal
defense for databases is "REVOKE CREATE ON SCHEMA public FROM PUBLIC".
Either one is sufficient to prevent attack.  After a REVOKE, consider
auditing the public schema for objects named like pg_catalog objects.

Authors of SECURITY DEFINER functions use some of the same defenses, and
the CREATE FUNCTION reference page already covered them thoroughly.
This is a good opportunity to audit SECURITY DEFINER functions for
robust security practice.

Back-patch to 9.3 (all supported versions).

Reviewed by Michael Paquier and Jonathan S. Katz.  Reported by Arseniy
Sharoglazov.

Security: CVE-2018-1058
2018-02-26 07:39:44 -08:00
Alvaro Herrera 9a89f6d854 Adjust ALTER TABLE docs on partitioned constraints
Move the "additional restrictions" comment to ALTER TABLE ADD
CONSTRAINT instead of ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX; and in the latter
instead indicate that partitioned tables are unsupported

Noted by David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-20 12:08:55 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera eb7ed3f306 Allow UNIQUE indexes on partitioned tables
If we restrict unique constraints on partitioned tables so that they
must always include the partition key, then our standard approach to
unique indexes already works --- each unique key is forced to exist
within a single partition, so enforcing the unique restriction in each
index individually is enough to have it enforced globally.  Therefore we
can implement unique indexes on partitions by simply removing a few
restrictions (and adding others.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171222212921.hi6hg6pem2w2t36z@alvherre.pgsql
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171229230607.3iib6b62fn3uaf47@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Simon Riggs, Jesper Pedersen, Peter Eisentraut, Jaime
	Casanova, Amit Langote
2018-02-19 17:40:00 -03:00
Tom Lane 439c7bc1a0 Doc: fix minor bug in CREATE TABLE example.
One example in create_table.sgml claimed to be showing table constraint
syntax, but it was really column constraint syntax due to the omission
of a comma.  This is both wrong and confusing, so fix it in all
supported branches.

Per report from neil@postgrescompare.com.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/151871659877.1393.2431103178451978795@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-02-15 13:56:38 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 7a32ac8a66 Add procedure support to pg_get_functiondef
This also makes procedures work in psql's \ef and \sf commands.

Reported-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
2018-02-13 15:13:44 -05:00
Tom Lane 0a459cec96 Support all SQL:2011 options for window frame clauses.
This patch adds the ability to use "RANGE offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING"
frame boundaries in window functions.  We'd punted on that back in the
original patch to add window functions, because it was not clear how to
do it in a reasonably data-type-extensible fashion.  That problem is
resolved here by adding the ability for btree operator classes to provide
an "in_range" support function that defines how to add or subtract the
RANGE offset value.  Factoring it this way also allows the operator class
to avoid overflow problems near the ends of the datatype's range, if it
wishes to expend effort on that.  (In the committed patch, the integer
opclasses handle that issue, but it did not seem worth the trouble to
avoid overflow failures for datetime types.)

The patch includes in_range support for the integer_ops opfamily
(int2/int4/int8) as well as the standard datetime types.  Support for
other numeric types has been requested, but that seems like suitable
material for a follow-on patch.

In addition, the patch adds GROUPS mode which counts the offset in
ORDER-BY peer groups rather than rows, and it adds the frame_exclusion
options specified by SQL:2011.  As far as I can see, we are now fully
up to spec on window framing options.

Existing behaviors remain unchanged, except that I changed the errcode
for a couple of existing error reports to meet the SQL spec's expectation
that negative "offset" values should be reported as SQLSTATE 22013.

Internally and in relevant parts of the documentation, we now consistently
use the terminology "offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING" rather than "value
PRECEDING/FOLLOWING", since the term "value" is confusingly vague.

Oliver Ford, reviewed and whacked around some by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGMVOdu9sivPAxbNN0X+q19Sfv9edEPv=HibOJhB14TJv_RCQg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-07 00:06:56 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 1d81c093db doc: Clarify psql --list documentation a bit more 2018-02-03 10:19:57 -05:00
Robert Haas 9da0cc3528 Support parallel btree index builds.
To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support
parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies
it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds.  Testing
to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial
index build.

The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive
at present, but it's better than not having the feature.  We can
refine it as we get more experience.

Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia.  While Heikki
Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches
without which this feature would not have been possible, and
therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author
of this feature.  Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas,
Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 13:32:44 -05:00
Stephen Frost a2a2205761 Improve ALTER TABLE synopsis
Add into the ALTER TABLE synopsis the definition of
partition_bound_spec, column_constraint, index_parameters and
exclude_element.

Initial patch by Lætitia Avrot, with further improvements by Amit
Langote and Thomas Munro.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/27ec4df3-d1ab-3411-f87f-647f944897e1%40lab.ntt.co.jp
2018-02-02 05:30:04 -05:00
Bruce Momjian eab30cc6b5 doc: fix trigger inheritance wording
Fix wording from commit 1cf1112990

Reported-by: Robert Haas

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 17:52:47 -05:00
Bruce Momjian 59ad246350 doc: clarify major/minor pg_upgrade versions with examples
The previous docs added in PG 10 were not clear enough for someone who
didn't understand the PG 10 version change, so give more specific
examples.

Reported-by: jim@room118solutions.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171218213041.25744.8414@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 17:09:59 -05:00
Bruce Momjian 1cf1112990 doc: clearify trigger behavior for inheritance
The previous wording added in PG 10 wasn't specific enough about the
behavior of statement and row triggers when using inheritance.

Reported-by: ian@thepathcentral.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171129193934.27108.30796@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 17:00:17 -05:00
Bruce Momjian de71541460 doc: Improve pg_upgrade rsync examples to use clusterdir
Commit 9521ce4a7a from Sep 13, 2017 and
backpatched through 9.5 used rsync examples with datadir.  The reporter
has pointed out, and testing has verified, that clusterdir must be used,
so update the docs accordingly.

Reported-by: Don Seiler

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHJZqBD0u9dCERpYzK6BkRv=663AmH==DFJpVC=M4Xg_rq2=CQ@mail.gmail.com

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2018-01-31 16:43:40 -05:00
Bruce Momjian e5dede9097 doc: mention datadir locations are actually config locations
Technically, pg_upgrade's --old-datadir and --new-datadir are
configuration directories, not necessarily data directories.  This is
reflected in the 'postgres' manual page, so do the same for pg_upgrade.

Reported-by: Yves Goergen

Bug: 14898

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171110220912.31513.13322@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 16:25:21 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 1e1e599d66 doc: Clarify pg_upgrade documentation
Clarify that the restriction against reg* types only applies to table
columns using these types, not to the type appearing in any other way,
for example as a function argument.
2018-01-29 14:26:17 -05:00
Tom Lane 4971d2a322 Remove the obsolete WITH clause of CREATE FUNCTION.
This clause was superseded by SQL-standard syntax back in 7.3.
We've kept it around for backwards-compatibility purposes ever since;
but 15 years seems like long enough for that, especially seeing that
there are undocumented weirdnesses in how it interacts with the
SQL-standard syntax for specifying the same options.

Michael Paquier, per an observation by Daniel Gustafsson;
some small cosmetic adjustments to nearby code by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180115022748.GB1724@paquier.xyz
2018-01-26 12:25:44 -05:00
Tom Lane 1368e92e16 Support --no-comments in pg_dump, pg_dumpall, pg_restore.
We have switches already to suppress other subsidiary object properties,
such as ACLs, security labels, ownership, and tablespaces, so just on
the grounds of symmetry we should allow suppressing comments as well.
Also, commit 0d4e6ed30 added a positive reason to have this feature,
i.e. to allow obtaining the old behavior of selective pg_restore should
anyone desire that.

Recent commits have removed the cases where pg_dump emitted comments on
built-in objects that the restoring user might not have privileges to
comment on, so the original primary motivation for this feature is gone,
but it still seems at least somewhat useful in its own right.

Robins Tharakan, reviewed by Fabrízio Mello

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEP4nAx22Z4ch74oJGzr5RyyjcyUSbpiFLyeYXX8pehfou92ug@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-25 15:27:24 -05:00
Tom Lane 0d4e6ed308 Clean up some aspects of pg_dump/pg_restore item-selection logic.
Ensure that CREATE DATABASE and related commands are issued when, and
only when, --create is specified.  Previously there were scenarios
where using selective-dump switches would prevent --create from having
any effect.  For example, it would fail to do anything in pg_restore
if the archive file had been made by a selective dump, because there
would be no TOC entry for the database.

Since we don't issue \connect either if we don't issue CREATE DATABASE,
this could result in unexpectedly restoring objects into the wrong
database.

Also fix pg_restore's selective restore logic so that when an object is
selected to be restored, we also restore its ACL, comment, and security
label if any.  Previously there was no way to get the latter properties
except through tedious mucking about with a -L file.  If, for some
reason, you don't want these properties, you can match the old behavior
by adding --no-acl etc.

While at it, try to make _tocEntryRequired() a little better organized
and better documented.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/32668.1516848577@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-01-25 14:26:15 -05:00
Bruce Momjian d6ab720360 doc: properly indent CREATE TRIGGER paragraph
This was done to match the surrounding indentation.  Text added in PG
10.

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-24 15:13:04 -05:00
Bruce Momjian e0a0deca38 doc: mention psql -l uses the 'postgres' database by default
Reported-by: Mark Wood

Bug: 14912

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171116171735.1474.30450@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Author: David G. Johnston

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-23 18:22:56 -05:00
Tom Lane c9707d9413 Documentation fix: pg_ctl no longer makes connection attempts.
Overlooked in commit f13ea95f9.  Noted by Nick Barnes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180123093723.7407.3386@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-01-23 12:42:03 -05:00
Tom Lane b3f8401205 Move handling of database properties from pg_dumpall into pg_dump.
This patch rearranges the division of labor between pg_dump and pg_dumpall
so that pg_dump itself handles all properties attached to a single
database.  Notably, a database's ACL (GRANT/REVOKE status) and local GUC
settings established by ALTER DATABASE SET and ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE SET
can be dumped and restored by pg_dump.  This is a long-requested
improvement.

"pg_dumpall -g" will now produce only role- and tablespace-related output,
nothing about individual databases.  The total output of a regular
pg_dumpall run remains the same.

pg_dump (or pg_restore) will restore database-level properties only when
creating the target database with --create.  This applies not only to
ACLs and GUCs but to the other database properties it already handled,
that is database comments and security labels.  This is more consistent
and useful, but does represent an incompatibility in the behavior seen
without --create.

(This change makes the proposed patch to have pg_dump use "COMMENT ON
DATABASE CURRENT_DATABASE" unnecessary, since there is no case where
the command is issued that we won't know the true name of the database.
We might still want that patch as a feature in its own right, but pg_dump
no longer needs it.)

pg_dumpall with --clean will now drop and recreate the "postgres" and
"template1" databases in the target cluster, allowing their locale and
encoding settings to be changed if necessary, and providing a cleaner
way to set nondefault tablespaces for them than we had before.  This
means that such a script must now always be started in the "postgres"
database; the order of drops and reconnects will not work otherwise.
Without --clean, the script will not adjust any database-level properties
of those two databases (including their comments, ACLs, and security
labels, which it formerly would try to set).

Another minor incompatibility is that the CREATE DATABASE commands in a
pg_dumpall script will now always specify locale and encoding settings.
Formerly those would be omitted if they matched the cluster's default.
While that behavior had some usefulness in some migration scenarios,
it also posed a significant hazard of unwanted locale/encoding changes.
To migrate to another locale/encoding, it's now necessary to use pg_dump
without --create to restore into a database with the desired settings.

Commit 4bd371f6f's hack to emit "SET default_transaction_read_only = off"
is gone: we now dodge that problem by the expedient of not issuing ALTER
DATABASE SET commands until after reconnecting to the target database.
Therefore, such settings won't apply during the restore session.

In passing, improve some shaky grammar in the docs, and add a note pointing
out that pg_dumpall's output can't be expected to load without any errors.
(Someday we might want to fix that, but this is not that patch.)

Haribabu Kommi, reviewed at various times by Andreas Karlsson,
Vaishnavi Prabakaran, and Robert Haas; further hacking by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJrrPGcUurV0eWTeXODwsOYFN=Ekq36t1s0YnFYUNzsmRfdAyA@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-22 14:09:09 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 8561e4840c Transaction control in PL procedures
In each of the supplied procedural languages (PL/pgSQL, PL/Perl,
PL/Python, PL/Tcl), add language-specific commit and rollback
functions/commands to control transactions in procedures in that
language.  Add similar underlying functions to SPI.  Some additional
cleanup so that transaction commit or abort doesn't blow away data
structures still used by the procedure call.  Add execution context
tracking to CALL and DO statements so that transaction control commands
can only be issued in top-level procedure and block calls, not function
calls or other procedure or block calls.

- SPI

Add a new function SPI_connect_ext() that is like SPI_connect() but
allows passing option flags.  The only option flag right now is
SPI_OPT_NONATOMIC.  A nonatomic SPI connection can execute transaction
control commands, otherwise it's not allowed.  This is meant to be
passed down from CALL and DO statements which themselves know in which
context they are called.  A nonatomic SPI connection uses different
memory management.  A normal SPI connection allocates its memory in
TopTransactionContext.  For nonatomic connections we use PortalContext
instead.  As the comment in SPI_connect_ext() (previously SPI_connect())
indicates, one could potentially use PortalContext in all cases, but it
seems safest to leave the existing uses alone, because this stuff is
complicated enough already.

SPI also gets new functions SPI_start_transaction(), SPI_commit(), and
SPI_rollback(), which can be used by PLs to implement their transaction
control logic.

- portalmem.c

Some adjustments were made in the code that cleans up portals at
transaction abort.  The portal code could already handle a command
*committing* a transaction and continuing (e.g., VACUUM), but it was not
quite prepared for a command *aborting* a transaction and continuing.

In AtAbort_Portals(), remove the code that marks an active portal as
failed.  As the comment there already predicted, this doesn't work if
the running command wants to keep running after transaction abort.  And
it's actually not necessary, because pquery.c is careful to run all
portal code in a PG_TRY block and explicitly runs MarkPortalFailed() if
there is an exception.  So the code in AtAbort_Portals() is never used
anyway.

In AtAbort_Portals() and AtCleanup_Portals(), we need to be careful not
to clean up active portals too much.  This mirrors similar code in
PreCommit_Portals().

- PL/Perl

Gets new functions spi_commit() and spi_rollback()

- PL/pgSQL

Gets new commands COMMIT and ROLLBACK.

Update the PL/SQL porting example in the documentation to reflect that
transactions are now possible in procedures.

- PL/Python

Gets new functions plpy.commit and plpy.rollback.

- PL/Tcl

Gets new commands commit and rollback.

Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndquadrant.com>
2018-01-22 08:43:06 -05:00
Robert Haas 2f17844104 Allow UPDATE to move rows between partitions.
When an UPDATE causes a row to no longer match the partition
constraint, try to move it to a different partition where it does
match the partition constraint.  In essence, the UPDATE is split into
a DELETE from the old partition and an INSERT into the new one.  This
can lead to surprising behavior in concurrency scenarios because
EvalPlanQual rechecks won't work as they normally did; the known
problems are documented.  (There is a pending patch to improve the
situation further, but it needs more review.)

Amit Khandekar, reviewed and tested by Amit Langote, David Rowley,
Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Dilip Kumar, Amul Sul, Thomas Munro, Álvaro
Herrera, Amit Kapila, and me.  A few final revisions by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAJ3gD9do9o2ccQ7j7+tSgiE1REY65XRiMb=yJO3u3QhyP8EEPQ@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-19 15:33:06 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera 8b08f7d482 Local partitioned indexes
When CREATE INDEX is run on a partitioned table, create catalog entries
for an index on the partitioned table (which is just a placeholder since
the table proper has no data of its own), and recurse to create actual
indexes on the existing partitions; create them in future partitions
also.

As a convenience gadget, if the new index definition matches some
existing index in partitions, these are picked up and used instead of
creating new ones.  Whichever way these indexes come about, they become
attached to the index on the parent table and are dropped alongside it,
and cannot be dropped on isolation unless they are detached first.

To support pg_dump'ing these indexes, add commands
    CREATE INDEX ON ONLY <table>
(which creates the index on the parent partitioned table, without
recursing) and
    ALTER INDEX ATTACH PARTITION
(which is used after the indexes have been created individually on each
partition, to attach them to the parent index).  These reconstruct prior
database state exactly.

Reviewed-by: (in alphabetical order) Peter Eisentraut, Robert Haas, Amit
	Langote, Jesper Pedersen, Simon Riggs, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171113170646.gzweigyrgg6pwsg4@alvherre.pgsql
2018-01-19 11:49:22 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut a063d842f8 doc: Expand documentation of session_replication_role 2018-01-18 09:34:51 -05:00
Teodor Sigaev bc7fa0c15c Improve scripting language in pgbench
Added:
 - variable now might contain integer, double, boolean and null values
 - functions ln, exp
 - logical AND/OR/NOT
 - bitwise AND/OR/NOT/XOR
 - bit right/left shift
 - comparison operators
 - IS [NOT] (NULL|TRUE|FALSE)
 - conditional choice (in form of when/case/then)

New operations and functions allow to implement more complicated test scenario.

Author: Fabien Coelho with minor editorization by me
Reviewed-By: Pavel Stehule, Jeevan Ladhe, me
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/alpine.DEB.2.10.1604030742390.31618@sto
2018-01-09 18:02:04 +03:00
Robert Haas 7a727c180a Add pow(), aka power(), function to pgbench.
Raúl Marín Rodríguez, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and Michael Paquier,
with a minor fix by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM6_UM4XiA14y9HnDqu9kAAOtwMhHZxW--q_ZACZW9Hsrsf-tg@mail.gmail.com
2017-12-27 10:45:45 -08:00
Teodor Sigaev 1fcd0adeb3 Add approximated Zipfian-distributed random generator to pgbench.
Generator helps to make close to real-world tests.

Author: Alik Khilazhev
Reviewed-By: Fabien COELHO
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/BF3B6F54-68C3-417A-BFAB-FB4D66F2B410@postgrespro.ru
2017-12-14 14:30:22 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut e4128ee767 SQL procedures
This adds a new object type "procedure" that is similar to a function
but does not have a return type and is invoked by the new CALL statement
instead of SELECT or similar.  This implementation is aligned with the
SQL standard and compatible with or similar to other SQL implementations.

This commit adds new commands CALL, CREATE/ALTER/DROP PROCEDURE, as well
as ALTER/DROP ROUTINE that can refer to either a function or a
procedure (or an aggregate function, as an extension to SQL).  There is
also support for procedures in various utility commands such as COMMENT
and GRANT, as well as support in pg_dump and psql.  Support for defining
procedures is available in all the languages supplied by the core
distribution.

While this commit is mainly syntax sugar around existing functionality,
future features will rely on having procedures as a separate object
type.

Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-11-30 11:03:20 -05:00
Dean Rasheed 26329ad8dc Fix broken XML in CREATE POLICY sgml.
Commit 87c2a17fee failed to close some tags (necessary now that the
SGML docs are in fact XML).
2017-11-24 13:59:25 +00:00
Dean Rasheed 87c2a17fee Doc: add a summary table to the CREATE POLICY docs.
This table summarizes which RLS policy expressions apply to each
command type, and whether they apply to the old or new tuples (or
both), which saves reading through a lot of text.

Rod Taylor, hacked on by me. Reviewed by Fabien Coelho.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHz80e4HxJShm6m9ZWFrHW=pgd2KP=RZmfFnEccujtPMiAOW5Q@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-24 12:01:18 +00:00
Peter Eisentraut 3c49c6facb Convert documentation to DocBook XML
Since some preparation work had already been done, the only source
changes left were changing empty-element tags like <xref linkend="foo">
to <xref linkend="foo"/>, and changing the DOCTYPE.

The source files are still named *.sgml, but they are actually XML files
now.  Renaming could be considered later.

In the build system, the intermediate step to convert from SGML to XML
is removed.  Everything is build straight from the source files again.
The OpenSP (or the old SP) package is no longer needed.

The documentation toolchain instructions are updated and are much
simpler now.

Peter Eisentraut, Alexander Lakhin, Jürgen Purtz
2017-11-23 09:44:28 -05:00
Tom Lane 16827d4424 pgbench: fix stats reporting when some transactions are skipped.
pgbench can skip some transactions when both -R and -L options are used.
Previously, this resulted in slightly silly statistics both in progress
reports and final output, because the skipped transactions were counted
as executed for TPS and related stats.  Discount skipped xacts in TPS
numbers, and also when figuring the percentage of xacts exceeding the
latency limit.

Also, don't print per-script skipped-transaction counts when there is
only one script.  That's redundant with the overall count, and it's
inconsistent with the fact that we don't print other per-script stats
when there's only one script.  Clean up some unnecessary interactions
between what should be independent options that were due to that
decision.

While at it, avoid division-by-zero in cases where no transactions were
executed.  While on modern platforms this would generally result in
printing "NaN" rather than a crash, that isn't spelled consistently
across platforms and it would confuse many people.  Skip the relevant
output entirely when practical, else print zeroes.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Steve Singer, additional hacking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/26654.1505232433@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-11-21 17:30:48 -05:00
Tom Lane 41761265e8 Doc: fix broken markup. 2017-11-21 16:37:11 -05:00
Simon Riggs c2513365a0 Parameter toast_tuple_target controls TOAST for new rows
Specifies the point at which we try to move long column values
into TOAST tables.

No effect on existing rows.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKsVmw6CX6YP9z7zqkTzcKV1+Uzr3XjKcZW=2Ya00OyQQ@mail.gmail.com

Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndQudrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndQuadrant.com>
2017-11-20 09:50:10 +11:00
Tom Lane 591c504fad Allow running just selected steps of pgbench's initialization sequence.
This feature caters to specialized use-cases such as running the normal
pgbench scenario with nonstandard indexes, or inserting other actions
between steps of the initialization sequence.  The normal sequence of
initialization actions is broken down into half a dozen steps which can
be executed in a user-specified order, to the extent to which that's
sensible.  The actions themselves aren't changed, except to make them
more robust against nonstandard uses:

* all four tables are now dropped in one DROP command, to reduce
assumptions about what foreign key relationships exist;

* all four tables are now truncated at the start of the data load
step, for consistency;

* the foreign key creation commands now specify constraint names, to
prevent accidentally creating duplicate constraints by executing the
'f' step twice.

Make some cosmetic adjustments in the messages emitted by pgbench
so that it's clear which steps are getting run, and so that the
messages agree with the documented names of the steps.

In passing, fix failure to enforce that the -v option is used only
in benchmarking mode.

Masahiko Sawada, reviewed by Fabien Coelho, editorialized a bit by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoCsz0ZzfCFcxYZ+PUdpkDd5VsCSG0Pre_-K1EgokCDFYA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-13 16:40:09 -05:00
Robert Haas 1aba8e651a Add hash partitioning.
Hash partitioning is useful when you want to partition a growing data
set evenly.  This can be useful to keep table sizes reasonable, which
makes maintenance operations such as VACUUM faster, or to enable
partition-wise join.

At present, we still depend on constraint exclusion for partitioning
pruning, and the shape of the partition constraints for hash
partitioning is such that that doesn't work.  Work is underway to fix
that, which should both improve performance and make partitioning
pruning work with hash partitioning.

Amul Sul, reviewed and tested by Dilip Kumar, Ashutosh Bapat, Yugo
Nagata, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Jesper Pedersen, and by me.  A few
final tweaks also by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b96fhpJAP=ALbETmeLk1Uni_GFZD938zgenhF49qgDTjaQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-09 18:07:44 -05:00
Stephen Frost 0fe2780db4 Remove inbound links to sql-createuser
CREATE USER is an alias for CREATE ROLE, not its own command any longer,
so clean up references to the 'sql-createuser' link to go to
'sql-createrole' instead.

In passing, change a few cases of 'CREATE USER' to be
'CREATE ROLE ...  LOGIN'.  The remaining cases appear reasonable and
also mention the distinction between 'CREATE ROLE' and 'CREATE USER'.
Also, don't say CREATE USER "assumes" LOGIN, but rather "includes".

Patch-by: David G. Johnston, with assumes->includes by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwYrbhKV8hH4TEABrDRBwf=gKremF=mLPQ6X2yGqxgFpYA@mail.gmail.com
2017-10-31 14:04:49 -04:00
Robert Haas 5f3971291f pg_receivewal: Add --no-sync option.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Kuntal Ghosh and by me.  I did a little
wordsmithing on the documentation, too.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqTuXuyEoVKcWcExh_b0uAjgWd_14KfGLrCTccBZ=VA0KA@mail.gmail.com
2017-10-29 12:46:55 +05:30
Robert Haas 9f295c08f8 Add table_constraint synopsis to ALTER TABLE documentation.
This is already present in the CREATE TABLE documentation, but it's
nicer not to have to refer to CREATE TABLE to find out the syntax
for ALTER TABLE.

Lætitia Avrot
2017-10-28 11:20:00 +02:00
Tom Lane e4fbf22831 Doc: mention that you can't PREPARE TRANSACTION after NOTIFY.
The NOTIFY page said this already, but the PREPARE TRANSACTION page
missed it.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171024010602.1488.80066@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-10-27 10:46:29 -04:00
Tom Lane a32c0923b4 Documentation improvements around domain types.
I was a bit surprised to find that domains were almost completely
unmentioned in the main SGML documentation, outside of the reference
pages for CREATE/ALTER/DROP DOMAIN.  In particular, noplace was it
mentioned that we don't support domains over composite, making it
hard to document the planned fix for that.

Hence, add a section about domains to chapter 8 (Data Types).

Also, modernize the type system overview in section 37.2; it had never
heard of range types, and insisted on calling arrays base types, which
seems a bit odd from a user's perspective; furthermore it didn't fit well
with the fact that we now support arrays over types other than base types.
It seems appropriate to use the term "container types" to describe all of
arrays, composites, and ranges, so let's do that.

Also a few other minor improvements, notably improve an example query
in rowtypes.sgml by using a LATERAL function instead of an ad-hoc
OFFSET 0 clause.

In part this is mop-up for commit c12d570fa, which missed updating 37.2
to reflect the fact that it added arrays of domains.  We could possibly
back-patch this without that claim, but I don't feel a strong need to.
2017-10-24 14:08:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 1ff01b3902 Convert SGML IDs to lower case
IDs in SGML are case insensitive, and we have accumulated a mix of upper
and lower case IDs, including different variants of the same ID.  In
XML, these will be case sensitive, so we need to fix up those
differences.  Going to all lower case seems most straightforward, and
the current build process already makes all anchors and lower case
anyway during the SGML->XML conversion, so this doesn't create any
difference in the output right now.  A future XML-only build process
would, however, maintain any mixed case ID spellings in the output, so
that is another reason to clean this up beforehand.

Author: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
2017-10-20 19:26:10 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera bf54c0f05c Make OWNER TO subcommand mention consistent
We say 'OWNER TO' in the synopsis; let's use that form elsewhere.

There is a paragraph in the <note> section that refers to various
subcommands very loosely (including OWNER); I didn't think it was an
improvement to change that one.

This is a fairly inconsequential change, so no backpatch.

Author: Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/69ec7b51-03e5-f523-95ce-c070ee790e70@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-10-18 13:32:45 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut c29c578908 Don't use SGML empty tags
For DocBook XML compatibility, don't use SGML empty tags (</>) anymore,
replace by the full tag name.  Add a warning option to catch future
occurrences.

Alexander Lakhin, Jürgen Purtz
2017-10-17 15:10:33 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 6ecabead4b REASSIGN OWNED BY doc: s/privileges/membership/
Reported by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwajWqjqEL9xc1xnnmTyBg32EdAZKJXijzigbosGSs_vag@mail.gmail.com
2017-10-17 11:45:34 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut d8794fd7c3 doc: Postgres -> PostgreSQL 2017-10-15 09:14:08 -04:00
Tom Lane 4de2d4fba3 Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state.
Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates'
final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set
aggregates' final functions always do.  This has always been a bit
limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the
built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states.
Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure
that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly.

There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely
read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes
the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the
state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns.  There are no
examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in
OSAs act like that.

This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support
for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging,
if their implementations cannot handle that.  While it was previously
possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was
not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is
something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for.  But better late
than never.

In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into
a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for
some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe
for frontend files to include.  This lets pg_dump use the symbolic
names for relevant constants.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 15:21:39 -04:00
Tom Lane 2860596832 Doc: fix missing explanation of default object privileges.
The GRANT reference page, which lists the default privileges for new
objects, failed to mention that USAGE is granted by default for data
types and domains.  As a lesser sin, it also did not specify anything
about the initial privileges for sequences, FDWs, foreign servers,
or large objects.  Fix that, and add a comment to acldefault() in the
probably vain hope of getting people to maintain this list in future.

Noted by Laurenz Albe, though I editorialized on the wording a bit.
Back-patch to all supported branches, since they all have this behavior.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1507620895.4152.1.camel@cybertec.at
2017-10-11 16:57:14 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 44b3230e82 Use lower-case SGML attribute values
for DocBook XML compatibility
2017-10-10 10:15:57 -04:00
Tom Lane 11d8d72c27 Allow multiple tables to be specified in one VACUUM or ANALYZE command.
Not much to say about this; does what it says on the tin.

However, formerly, if there was a column list then the ANALYZE action was
implied; now it must be specified, or you get an error.  This is because
it would otherwise be a bit unclear what the user meant if some tables
have column lists and some don't.

Nathan Bossart, reviewed by Michael Paquier and Masahiko Sawada, with some
editorialization by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E061A8E3-5E3D-494D-94F0-E8A9B312BBFC@amazon.com
2017-10-03 18:53:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut f41bd4cb90 Expand collation documentation
Document better how to create custom collations and what locale strings
ICU accepts.  Explain the ICU examples in more detail.  Also update the
text on the CREATE COLLATION reference page a bit to take ICU more into
account.
2017-10-02 11:51:45 -04:00
Tom Lane 28e0727076 Revert to 9.6 treatment of ALTER TYPE enumtype ADD VALUE.
This reverts commit 15bc038f9, along with the followon commits 1635e80d3
and 984c92074 that tried to clean up the problems exposed by bug #14825.
The result was incomplete because it failed to address parallel-query
requirements.  With 10.0 release so close upon us, now does not seem like
the time to be adding more code to fix that.  I hope we can un-revert this
code and add the missing parallel query support during the v11 cycle.

Back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170922185904.1448.16585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-27 16:14:43 -04:00
Dean Rasheed af44cbd5ec Improve the CREATE POLICY documentation.
Provide a correct description of how multiple policies are combined,
clarify when SELECT permissions are required, mention SELECT FOR
UPDATE/SHARE, and do some other more minor tidying up.

Reviewed by Stephen Frost

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCVrxyYbOFU8XbGHicz%2BmXPYzw%3DhfNL2XTphDt-53TomQQ%40mail.gmail.com

Back-patch to 9.5.
2017-09-27 17:16:15 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut 3709ca1cf0 pg_basebackup: Add option to create replication slot
When requesting a particular replication slot, the new pg_basebackup
option -C/--create-slot creates it before starting to replicate from it.

Further refactor the slot creation logic to include the temporary slot
creation logic into the same function.  Add new arguments is_temporary
and preserve_wal to CreateReplicationSlot().  Print in --verbose mode
that a slot has been created.

Author: Michael Banck <michael.banck@credativ.de>
2017-09-27 08:49:47 -04:00
Tom Lane 984c92074d Remove heuristic same-transaction test from check_safe_enum_use().
The blacklist mechanism added by the preceding commit directly fixes
most of the practical cases that the same-transaction test was meant
to cover.  What remains is use-cases like

	begin;
	create type e as enum('x');
	alter type e add value 'y';
	-- use 'y' somehow
	commit;

However, because the same-transaction test is heuristic, it fails on
small variants of that, such as renaming the type or changing its
owner.  Rather than try to explain the behavior to users, let's
remove it and just have a rule that the newly added value can't be
used before being committed, full stop.  Perhaps later it will be
worth the implementation effort and overhead to have a more accurate
test for type-was-created-in-this-transaction.  We'll wait for some
field experience with v10 before deciding to do that.

Back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170922185904.1448.16585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-26 13:14:46 -04:00
Tom Lane 1635e80d30 Use a blacklist to distinguish original from add-on enum values.
Commit 15bc038f9 allowed ALTER TYPE ADD VALUE to be executed inside
transaction blocks, by disallowing the use of the added value later
in the same transaction, except under limited circumstances.  However,
the test for "limited circumstances" was heuristic and could reject
references to enum values that were created during CREATE TYPE AS ENUM,
not just later.  This breaks the use-case of restoring pg_dump scripts
in a single transaction, as reported in bug #14825 from Balazs Szilfai.

We can improve this by keeping a "blacklist" table of enum value OIDs
created by ALTER TYPE ADD VALUE during the current transaction.  Any
visible-but-uncommitted value whose OID is not in the blacklist must
have been created by CREATE TYPE AS ENUM, and can be used safely
because it could not have a lifespan shorter than its parent enum type.

This change also removes the restriction that a renamed enum value
can't be used before being committed (unless it was on the blacklist).

Andrew Dunstan, with cosmetic improvements by me.
Back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170922185904.1448.16585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-26 13:14:46 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 15a8010ed6 Sort pg_basebackup options better
The --slot option somehow ended up under options controlling the output,
and some other options were in a nonsensical place or were not moved
after recent renamings, so tidy all that up a bit.
2017-09-26 11:58:22 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 91ad8b416c doc: Document commands that cannot be run in a transaction block
Mainly covering the new CREATE SUBSCRIPTION and DROP SUBSCRIPTION, but
ALTER DATABASE SET TABLESPACE was also missing.
2017-09-22 15:01:13 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan d57c7a7c50 Provide a test for variable existence in psql
"\if :{?variable_name}" will be translated to "\if TRUE" if the variable
exists and "\if FALSE" otherwise. Thus it will be possible to execute code
conditionally on the existence of the variable, regardless of its value.

Fabien Coelho, with some review by Robins Tharakan and some light text
editing by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1708260835520.3627@lancre
2017-09-21 19:02:23 -04:00
Tom Lane 36b564c648 Fix erroneous documentation about noise word GROUP.
GRANT, REVOKE, and some allied commands allow the noise word GROUP
before a role name (cf. grantee production in gram.y).  This option
does not exist elsewhere, but it had nonetheless snuck into the
documentation for ALTER ROLE, ALTER USER, and CREATE SCHEMA.

Seems to be a copy-and-pasteo in commit 31eae6028, which did expand the
syntax choices here, but not in that way.  Back-patch to 9.5 where that
came in.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170916123750.8885.66941@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-20 11:10:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 00210e3fb9 docs: re-add instructions on setting wal_level for rsync use
This step was erroneously removed four days ago by me.

Reported-by: Magnus via IM

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-20 09:36:19 -04:00
Magnus Hagander 2c74e6c1dc Mention need for --no-inc-recursive in rsync command
Since rsync 3.0.0 (released in 2008), the default way to enumerate
changes was changed in a way that makes it less likely that the hardlink
sync mode works. Since the whole point of the documented procedure is
for the hardlinks to work, change our docs to suggest using the
backwards compatibility switch.
2017-09-20 14:09:05 +02:00
Andres Freund fc49e24fa6 Make WAL segment size configurable at initdb time.
For performance reasons a larger segment size than the default 16MB
can be useful. A larger segment size has two main benefits: Firstly,
in setups using archiving, it makes it easier to write scripts that
can keep up with higher amounts of WAL, secondly, the WAL has to be
written and synced to disk less frequently.

But at the same time large segment size are disadvantageous for
smaller databases. So far the segment size had to be configured at
compile time, often making it unrealistic to choose one fitting to a
particularly load. Therefore change it to a initdb time setting.

This includes a breaking changes to the xlogreader.h API, which now
requires the current segment size to be configured.  For that and
similar reasons a number of binaries had to be taught how to recognize
the current segment size.

Author: Beena Emerson, editorialized by Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, David Steele, Kuntal Ghosh, Michael
    Paquier, Peter Eisentraut, Robert Hass, Tushar Ahuja
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOG9ApEAcQ--1ieKbhFzXSQPw_YLmepaa4hNdnY5+ZULpt81Mw@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-19 22:03:48 -07:00
Tom Lane fd31f9f033 Ensure that BEFORE STATEMENT triggers fire the right number of times.
Commit 0f79440fb introduced mechanism to keep AFTER STATEMENT triggers
from firing more than once per statement, which was formerly possible
if more than one FK enforcement action had to be applied to a given
table.  Add a similar mechanism for BEFORE STATEMENT triggers, so that
we don't have the unexpected situation of firing BEFORE STATEMENT
triggers more often than AFTER STATEMENT.

As with the previous patch, back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/22315.1505584992@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-09-17 12:16:38 -04:00
Tom Lane 0f79440fb0 Fix SQL-spec incompatibilities in new transition table feature.
The standard says that all changes of the same kind (insert, update, or
delete) caused in one table by a single SQL statement should be reported
in a single transition table; and by that, they mean to include foreign key
enforcement actions cascading from the statement's direct effects.  It's
also reasonable to conclude that if the standard had wCTEs, they would say
that effects of wCTEs applying to the same table as each other or the outer
statement should be merged into one transition table.  We weren't doing it
like that.

Hence, arrange to merge tuples from multiple update actions into a single
transition table as much as we can.  There is a problem, which is that if
the firing of FK enforcement triggers and after-row triggers with
transition tables is interspersed, we might need to report more tuples
after some triggers have already seen the transition table.  It seems like
a bad idea for the transition table to be mutable between trigger calls.
There's no good way around this without a major redesign of the FK logic,
so for now, resolve it by opening a new transition table each time this
happens.

Also, ensure that AFTER STATEMENT triggers fire just once per statement,
or once per transition table when we're forced to make more than one.
Previous versions of Postgres have allowed each FK enforcement query
to cause an additional firing of the AFTER STATEMENT triggers for the
referencing table, but that's certainly not per spec.  (We're still
doing multiple firings of BEFORE STATEMENT triggers, though; is that
something worth changing?)

Also, forbid using transition tables with column-specific UPDATE triggers.
The spec requires such transition tables to show only the tuples for which
the UPDATE trigger would have fired, which means maintaining multiple
transition tables or else somehow filtering the contents at readout.
Maybe someday we'll bother to support that option, but it looks like a
lot of trouble for a marginal feature.

The transition tables are now managed by the AfterTriggers data structures,
rather than being directly the responsibility of ModifyTable nodes.  This
removes a subtransaction-lifespan memory leak introduced by my previous
band-aid patch 3c4359521.

In passing, refactor the AfterTriggers data structures to reduce the
management overhead for them, by using arrays of structs rather than
several parallel arrays for per-query-level and per-subtransaction state.

I failed to resist the temptation to do some copy-editing on the SGML
docs about triggers, above and beyond merely documenting the effects
of this patch.

Back-patch to v10, because we don't want the semantics of transition
tables to change post-release.

Patch by me, with help and review from Thomas Munro.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170909064853.25630.12825@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-16 13:20:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 04b64b8ddf docs: clarify pg_upgrade docs regarding standbys and rsync
Document that rsync is an _optional_ way to upgrade standbys, suggest
rsync option --dry-run, and mention a way of upgrading one standby from
another using rsync.  Also clarify some instructions by specifying if
they operate on the old or new clusters.

Reported-by: Stephen Frost, Magnus Hagander

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170914191250.GB6595@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-16 11:58:00 -04:00
Robert Haas 9361f6f54e After a MINVALUE/MAXVALUE bound, allow only more of the same.
In the old syntax, which used UNBOUNDED, we had a similar restriction,
but commit d363d42bb9, which changed the
syntax, eliminated it.  Put it back.

Patch by me, reviewed by Dean Rasheed.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobs+pLPC27tS3gOpEAxAffHrq5w509cvkwTf9pF6cWYbg@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-15 21:15:55 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 82e367ddbf docs: adjust "link mode" mention in pg_upgrade streaming steps
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-13 09:22:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 9521ce4a7a docs: improve pg_upgrade standby instructions
This makes it clear that pg_upgrade standby upgrade instructions should
only be used in link mode, adds examples, and explains how rsync works
with links.

Reported-by: Andreas Joseph Krogh

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/VisenaEmail.6c.c0e592c5af4ef0a2.15e785dcb61@tc7-visena

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-13 09:11:28 -04:00
Tom Lane 69835bc898 Add psql variables to track success/failure of SQL queries.
This patch adds ERROR, SQLSTATE, and ROW_COUNT, which are updated after
every query, as well as LAST_ERROR_MESSAGE and LAST_ERROR_SQLSTATE,
which are updated only when a query fails.  The expected usage of these
is for scripting.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Pavel Stehule

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1704042158020.12290@lancre
2017-09-12 19:27:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 2d4a614e1e docs: improve pg_upgrade rsync instructions
This explains how rsync accomplishes updating standby servers and
clarifies the instructions.

Reported-by: Andreas Joseph Krogh

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/VisenaEmail.10.2b4049e43870bd16.15d898d696f@tc7-visena

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-12 13:17:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 6d9fa52645 pg_receivewal: Add --endpos option
This is primarily useful for making tests of this utility more
deterministic, to avoid the complexity of starting pg_receivewal as a
deamon in TAP tests.

While this is less useful than the equivalent pg_recvlogical option,
users can as well use it for example to enforce WAL streaming up to a
end-of-backup position, to save only a minimal amount of WAL.

Use this new option to stream WAL data in a deterministic way within a
new set of TAP tests.

Author: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-09-11 16:48:30 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 821fb8cdbf Message style fixes 2017-09-11 11:21:27 -04:00
Robert Haas 6f6b99d133 Allow a partitioned table to have a default partition.
Any tuples that don't route to any other partition will route to the
default partition.

Jeevan Ladhe, Beena Emerson, Ashutosh Bapat, Rahila Syed, and Robert
Haas, with review and testing at various stages by (at least) Rushabh
Lathia, Keith Fiske, Amit Langote, Amul Sul, Rajkumar Raghuanshi, Sven
Kunze, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Thom Brown, Rafia Sabih, and Dilip Kumar.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28tbN4SYyhS7YV1YBWcitkqbhSWfQCy0G=apRcC_PEO-bg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAOG9ApEYj34fWMcvBMBQ-YtqR9fTdXhdN82QEKG0SVZ6zeL1xg@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-08 17:28:04 -04:00
Tom Lane b976499480 Improve documentation about behavior of multi-statement Query messages.
We've long done our best to sweep this topic under the rug, but in view
of recent work it seems like it's time to explain it more precisely.
Here's an initial cut at doing that.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1F6BE40D@G01JPEXMBYT05
2017-09-07 14:04:45 -04:00
Simon Riggs 5b6d13eec7 Allow SET STATISTICS on expression indexes
Index columns are referenced by ordinal number rather than name, e.g.
CREATE INDEX coord_idx ON measured (x, y, (z + t));
ALTER INDEX coord_idx ALTER COLUMN 3 SET STATISTICS 1000;

Incompatibility note for release notes:
\d+ for indexes now also displays Stats Target

Authors: Alexander Korotkov, with contribution by Adrien NAYRAT
Review: Adrien NAYRAT, Simon Riggs
Wordsmith: Simon Riggs
2017-09-06 13:46:01 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut 1c53f612bc Escape < and & in SGML
This is not required in SGML, but will be in XML, so this is a step to
prepare for the conversion to XML.  (It is still not required to escape
>, but we did it here in some cases for symmetry.)

Add a command-line option to osx/onsgmls calls to warn about unescaped
occurrences in the future.

Author: Alexander Law <exclusion@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-09-06 11:22:43 -04:00
Tom Lane 49ca462eb1 Add \gdesc psql command.
This command acts somewhat like \g, but instead of executing the query
buffer, it merely prints a description of the columns that the query
result would have.  (Of course, this still requires parsing the query;
if parse analysis fails, you get an error anyway.)  We accomplish this
using an unnamed prepared statement, which should be invisible to psql
users.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRBhYVvO34FU=EKb=nAF5t3b++krKt1FneCmR0kuF5m-QA@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-05 18:17:47 -04:00
Tom Lane 5e8304fdce In psql, use PSQL_PAGER in preference to PAGER, if it's set.
This allows the user's environment to set up a psql-specific choice
of pager, in much the same way that we provide PSQL_EDITOR to allow
a psql-specific override of the more widely known EDITOR variable.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Thomas Munro

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRD3RRk9S1eRbnGm_T6brc3Ss5mohraNzTSJquzx+pmtKA@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-05 12:02:13 -04:00
Tom Lane 9ae9d8c154 Add psql variables showing server version and psql version.
We already had a psql variable VERSION that shows the verbose form of
psql's own version.  Add VERSION_NAME to show the short form (e.g.,
"11devel") and VERSION_NUM to show the numeric form (e.g., 110000).
Also add SERVER_VERSION_NAME and SERVER_VERSION_NUM to show the short and
numeric forms of the server's version.  (We'd probably add SERVER_VERSION
with the verbose string if it were readily available; but adding another
network round trip to get it seems too expensive.)

The numeric forms, in particular, are expected to be useful for scripting
purposes, now that psql can do conditional tests.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Pavel Stehule

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1704020917220.4632@lancre
2017-09-05 10:51:36 -04:00
Tom Lane 9d36a38660 Adjust pgbench to allow non-ASCII characters in variable names.
This puts it in sync with psql's notion of what is a valid variable name.
Like psql, we document that "non-Latin letters" are allowed, but actually
any non-ASCII character is accepted.

Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170405.094548.1184280384967203518.t-ishii@sraoss.co.jp
2017-09-04 13:45:20 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut afc58affb6 doc: Fix typos and other minor issues
Author: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
2017-09-01 23:34:12 -04:00
Robert Haas 84be67181a pg_dumpall: Add a -E flag to set the encoding, like pg_dump has.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqQcYWmrm2n-dVaMUhYPKFU_DxQwPuUGuC4ZF+8B=dS5xQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-01 12:24:20 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 46596f8d6b Clarify documentation
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20170618071607.GA16418%40nol.local
2017-08-27 21:29:54 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut cf851519d4 pg_dump: Support using synchronized snapshots on standbys
This became possible by commit
6c2003f8a1.  This just makes pg_dump aware
of it and updates the documentation.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-08-16 19:46:50 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 0a2d43d988 doc: Document pg_receivewal exit behavior and status 2017-08-15 20:26:58 -04:00
Robert Haas 23d7680d04 pg_dump: Add a --load-via-partition-root option.
Rushabh Lathia, reviewed and somewhat revised by me.  Testing by
Rajkumar Raghuwanshi.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAGPqQf0C1he087bz9xRBOGZBuESYz9X=Fp8Ca_g+TfHgAff75g@mail.gmail.com
2017-08-14 22:54:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut fa65c8c73c doc: Update description of rolreplication column
Since PostgreSQL 9.6, rolreplication no longer determines whether a role
can run pg_start_backup() and pg_stop_backup(), so remove that.

Add that this attribute determines whether a role can create and drop
replication slots.

Reported-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
2017-08-11 16:14:55 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 22701a7ec6 doc: Small wording improvement
Author: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2017-08-11 15:52:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut a1ef920e27 Remove uses of "slave" in replication contexts
This affects mostly code comments, some documentation, and tests.
Official APIs already used "standby".
2017-08-10 22:55:41 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas bf6b9e9444 Don't allow logging in with empty password.
Some authentication methods allowed it, others did not. In the client-side,
libpq does not even try to authenticate with an empty password, which makes
using empty passwords hazardous: an administrator might think that an
account with an empty password cannot be used to log in, because psql
doesn't allow it, and not realize that a different client would in fact
allow it. To clear that confusion and to be be consistent, disallow empty
passwords in all authentication methods.

All the authentication methods that used plaintext authentication over the
wire, except for BSD authentication, already checked that the password
received from the user was not empty. To avoid forgetting it in the future
again, move the check to the recv_password_packet function. That only
forbids using an empty password with plaintext authentication, however.
MD5 and SCRAM need a different fix:

* In stable branches, check that the MD5 hash stored for the user does not
not correspond to an empty string. This adds some overhead to MD5
authentication, because the server needs to compute an extra MD5 hash, but
it is not noticeable in practice.

* In HEAD, modify CREATE and ALTER ROLE to clear the password if an empty
string, or a password hash that corresponds to an empty string, is
specified. The user-visible behavior is the same as in the stable branches,
the user cannot log in, but it seems better to stop the empty password from
entering the system in the first place. Secondly, it is fairly expensive to
check that a SCRAM hash doesn't correspond to an empty string, because
computing a SCRAM hash is much more expensive than an MD5 hash by design,
so better avoid doing that on every authentication.

We could clear the password on CREATE/ALTER ROLE also in stable branches,
but we would still need to check at authentication time, because even if we
prevent empty passwords from being stored in pg_authid, there might be
existing ones there already.

Reported by Jeroen van der Ham, Ben de Graaff and Jelte Fennema.

Security: CVE-2017-7546
2017-08-07 17:03:42 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut b374481221 Further unify ROLE and USER command grammar rules
ALTER USER ... SET did not support all the syntax variants of ALTER ROLE
...  SET.  Fix that, and to avoid further deviations of this kind, unify
many the grammar rules for ROLE/USER/GROUP commands.

Reported-by: Pavel Golub <pavel@microolap.com>
2017-08-03 20:34:45 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut c1bb787046 doc: Fix typo
Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2017-08-01 14:37:26 -04:00
Dean Rasheed d363d42bb9 Use MINVALUE/MAXVALUE instead of UNBOUNDED for range partition bounds.
Previously, UNBOUNDED meant no lower bound when used in the FROM list,
and no upper bound when used in the TO list, which was OK for
single-column range partitioning, but problematic with multiple
columns. For example, an upper bound of (10.0, UNBOUNDED) would not be
collocated with a lower bound of (10.0, UNBOUNDED), thus making it
difficult or impossible to define contiguous multi-column range
partitions in some cases.

Fix this by using MINVALUE and MAXVALUE instead of UNBOUNDED to
represent a partition column that is unbounded below or above
respectively. This syntax removes any ambiguity, and ensures that if
one partition's lower bound equals another partition's upper bound,
then the partitions are contiguous.

Also drop the constraint prohibiting finite values after an unbounded
column, and just document the fact that any values after MINVALUE or
MAXVALUE are ignored. Previously it was necessary to repeat UNBOUNDED
multiple times, which was needlessly verbose.

Note: Forces a post-PG 10 beta2 initdb.

Report by Amul Sul, original patch by Amit Langote with some
additional hacking by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b947mowpLdxL3jo3YLKngRjrq9+Ej4ymduQTfYR+8=YAYQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-07-21 09:20:47 +01:00
Tom Lane ed3dc224e5 Doc: clarify description of degenerate NATURAL joins.
Claiming that NATURAL JOIN is equivalent to CROSS JOIN when there are
no common column names is only strictly correct if it's an inner join;
you can't say e.g. CROSS LEFT JOIN.  Better to explain it as meaning
JOIN ON TRUE, instead.  Per a suggestion from David Johnston.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwb+mYszQhDS9f_dqRrk1=Pe-S6D=XMkAXcDf4ykKPmgKQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-07-20 12:41:26 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 1bac5f552a pg_ctl: Make failure to complete operation a nonzero exit
If an operation being waited for does not complete within the timeout,
then exit with a nonzero exit status.  This was previously handled
inconsistently.
2017-07-05 13:37:08 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 5191e357cf psql documentation fixes
Update the documentation for \pset to mention
columns|linestyle|pager_min_lines.  Add various mentions of \pset
command equivalences that were previously inconsistent.

Author: Дилян Палаузов <dpa-postgres@aegee.org>
2017-07-04 21:10:08 -04:00
Andrew Gierth 501ed02cf6 Fix transition tables for partition/inheritance.
We disallow row-level triggers with transition tables on child tables.
Transition tables for triggers on the parent table contain only those
columns present in the parent.  (We can't mix tuple formats in a
single transition table.)

Patch by Thomas Munro

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BTgmoZzTBBAsEUh4MazAN7ga%3D8SsMC-Knp-6cetts9yNZUCcg%40mail.gmail.com
2017-06-28 18:55:03 +01:00
Tom Lane de0c60b7d3 Doc: minor improvements for collation-related man pages. 2017-06-25 12:27:04 -04:00
Tom Lane ba63dbd9ed Upgrade documentation connected with shared_preload_libraries et al.
Noplace in the documentation actually defined what these variables
contain.  Define them as lists of arguments for LOAD, and improve
that command's documentation a bit.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-oJtxHVDc3H+Km3CjB9mY1VDzuyaVH_ZYSz7iXcRqCtb93Ew@mail.gmail.com
2017-06-20 13:40:06 -04:00
Tom Lane d14c85ed1a Fix materialized-view documentation oversights.
When materialized views were added, psql's \d commands were made to
treat them as a separate object category ... but not everyplace in the
documentation or comments got the memo.

Noted by David Johnston.  Back-patch to 9.3 where matviews came in.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwb27M3VXRhHErjCpkWwN9eKThbqWb1=trtoXi9_ejqPXQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-06-19 18:32:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 1c25ef6363 doc: Improve logical replication security setup info
Reported-by: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2017-06-19 17:30:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut bbaf9e8f84 Documentation spell checking and markup improvements 2017-06-18 14:02:12 -04:00
Magnus Hagander 81a4dcf2f2 Fix copy/paste error in docs
Author: Julien Rouhaud <julien.rouhaud@dalibo.com>
2017-06-18 19:41:46 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut 806dccee23 doc: Fix typo
Author: Julien Rouhaud <julien.rouhaud@dalibo.com>
2017-06-17 10:21:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 57fb1d677d doc: Add note that COPY commands are published as INSERTs 2017-06-16 21:04:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 07fb943335 doc: remove mention of Windows junction points by pg_upgrade
pg_upgrade never used Windows junction points but instead always used
Windows hard links.

Reported-by: Adrian Klaver

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6a638c60-90bb-4921-8ee4-5fdad68f8b09@aklaver.com

Backpatch-through: 9.3, where the mention first appeared
2017-06-15 13:25:45 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 0f33a719fd docs: Fix pg_upgrade standby server upgrade docs
It was unsafe to instruct users to start/stop the server after
pg_upgrade was run but before the standby servers were rsync'ed.  The
new instructions avoid this.

RELEASE NOTES:  This fix should be mentioned in the minor release notes.

Reported-by: Dmitriy Sarafannikov and Sergey Burladyan

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87wp8o506b.fsf@seb.koffice.internal

Backpatch-through: 9.5, where standby server upgrade instructions first appeared
2017-06-15 12:30:02 -04:00
Andres Freund 6c2003f8a1 Don't force-assign transaction id when exporting a snapshot.
Previously we required every exported transaction to have an xid
assigned. That was used to check that the exporting transaction is
still running, which in turn is needed to guarantee that that
necessary rows haven't been removed in between exporting and importing
the snapshot.

The exported xid caused unnecessary problems with logical decoding,
because slot creation has to wait for all concurrent xid to finish,
which in turn serializes concurrent slot creation.   It also
prohibited snapshots to be exported on hot-standby replicas.

Instead export the virtual transactionid, which avoids the unnecessary
serialization and the inability to export snapshots on standbys. This
changes the file name of the exported snapshot, but since we never
documented what that one means, that seems ok.

Author: Petr Jelinek, slightly editorialized by me
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f598b4b8-8cd7-0d54-0939-adda763d8c34@2ndquadrant.com
2017-06-14 11:57:21 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut f0cfff9da2 doc: Whitespace fixes in man pages 2017-06-14 13:56:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 0d9bdbcaae Put documentation of options and commands in more alphabetical order 2017-06-14 11:10:17 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 39da0f709d doc: Update example version numbers in pg_upgrade documentation
The exact numbers don't matter, since they are examples, but it was
looking quite dated.

For the target version, we now automatically substitute the current
major version.  The updated example source version should be good for a
couple of years.
2017-06-13 16:10:11 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut bf6e4c3c82 Trim trailing whitespace 2017-06-12 09:51:18 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii eab86897bd Fix ALTER TABLE doc examples.
Patch by Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>.  Confirmed by Amit
Langote, who is the original author of the document part.
2017-06-12 14:49:25 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut 0933fcee98 doc: Document that subscriptions to same server might hang 2017-06-09 17:14:06 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 7ff9812f9a Put new command-line options in alphabetical order 2017-06-08 12:12:31 -04:00
Tom Lane 0198c277a2 Docs: improve CREATE TABLE ref page's discussion of partition bounds.
Clarify in the syntax synopsis that partition bound values must be
exactly numeric literals or string literals; previously it
said "bound_literal" which was defined nowhere.

Replace confusing --- and, I think, incorrect in detail --- definition
of how range bounds work with a reference to row-wise comparison plus
a concrete example (which I stole from Robert Haas).

Minor copy-editing in the same area.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/30475.1496005465@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28106.1496041449@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-06-07 17:23:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 9907b55ceb Fix ALTER SUBSCRIPTION grammar ambiguity
There was a grammar ambiguity between SET PUBLICATION name REFRESH and
SET PUBLICATION SKIP REFRESH, because SKIP is not a reserved word.  To
resolve that, fold the refresh choice into the WITH options.  Refreshing
is the default now.

Reported-by: tushar <tushar.ahuja@enterprisedb.com>
2017-06-05 21:43:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut de492c17f0 doc: Add note that DROP SUBSCRIPTION drops replication slot
Add some information about what to do when this fails.
2017-06-02 15:16:57 -04:00
Andres Freund 3d79013b97 Make ALTER SEQUENCE, including RESTART, fully transactional.
Previously the changes to the "data" part of the sequence, i.e. the
one containing the current value, were not transactional, whereas the
definition, including minimum and maximum value were.  That leads to
odd behaviour if a schema change is rolled back, with the potential
that out-of-bound sequence values can be returned.

To avoid the issue create a new relfilenode fork whenever ALTER
SEQUENCE is executed, similar to how TRUNCATE ... RESTART IDENTITY
already is already handled.

This commit also makes ALTER SEQUENCE RESTART transactional, as it
seems to be too confusing to have some forms of ALTER SEQUENCE behave
transactionally, some forms not.  This way setval() and nextval() are
not transactional, but DDL is, which seems to make sense.

This commit also rolls back parts of the changes made in 3d092fe540
and f8dc1985f as they're now not needed anymore.

Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170522154227.nvafbsm62sjpbxvd@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: Bug is in master/v10 only
2017-06-01 14:19:33 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut 185364b161 doc: Fix ALTER PUBLICATION details
Some of the text was made nonsensical by commit
e950024066.  Fix that and make some other
minor changes.

Reported-by: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2017-05-30 11:48:39 -04:00
Tom Lane f3db7f164a Prevent running pg_resetwal/pg_resetxlog against wrong-version data dirs.
pg_resetwal (formerly pg_resetxlog) doesn't insist on finding a matching
version number in pg_control, and that seems like an important thing to
preserve since recovering from corrupt pg_control is a prime reason to
need to run it.  However, that means you can try to run it against a
data directory of a different major version, which is at best useless
and at worst disastrous.  So as to provide some protection against that
type of pilot error, inspect PG_VERSION at startup and refuse to do
anything if it doesn't match.  PG_VERSION is read-only after initdb,
so it's unlikely to get corrupted, and even if it were corrupted it would
be easy to fix by hand.

This hazard has been there all along, so back-patch to all supported
branches.

Michael Paquier, with some kibitzing by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f4b8eb91-b934-8a0d-b3cc-68f06e2279d1@enterprisedb.com
2017-05-29 17:08:16 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera eb67e2e35a extended stats: Clarify behavior of omitting stat type clause
Pointed out by Jeff Janes
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMkU=1zGhK-nW10RAXhokcT3MM=YBg=j5LkG9RMDwmu3i0H0Og@mail.gmail.com
2017-05-25 13:22:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut f4205c4c1f doc: Fix ALTER SUBSCRIPTION option syntax synopsis
Author: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
2017-05-18 21:39:06 -04:00
Robert Haas 3ec76ff1f2 Don't explicitly mark range partitioning columns NOT NULL.
This seemed like a good idea originally because there's no way to mark
a range partition as accepting NULL, but that now seems more like a
current limitation than something we want to lock down for all time.
For example, there's a proposal to add the notion of a default
partition which accepts all rows not otherwise routed, which directly
conflicts with the idea that a range-partitioned table should never
allow nulls anywhere.  So let's change this while we still can, by
putting the NOT NULL test into the partition constraint instead of
changing the column properties.

Amit Langote and Robert Haas, reviewed by Amit Kapila

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/8e2dd63d-c6fb-bb74-3c2b-ed6d63629c9d@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-05-18 13:49:31 -04:00
Tom Lane 6accefd466 Update CREATE SUBSCRIPTION docs for recent syntax change.
Masahiko Sawada
2017-05-15 22:06:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut f8dc1985fd Fix ALTER SEQUENCE locking
In 1753b1b027, the pg_sequence system
catalog was introduced.  This made sequence metadata changes
transactional, while the actual sequence values are still behaving
nontransactionally.  This requires some refinement in how ALTER
SEQUENCE, which operates on both, locks the sequence and the catalog.

The main problems were:

- Concurrent ALTER SEQUENCE causes "tuple concurrently updated" error,
  caused by updates to pg_sequence catalog.

- Sequence WAL writes and catalog updates are not protected by same
  lock, which could lead to inconsistent recovery order.

- nextval() disregarding uncommitted ALTER SEQUENCE changes.

To fix, nextval() and friends now lock the sequence using
RowExclusiveLock instead of AccessShareLock.  ALTER SEQUENCE locks the
sequence using ShareRowExclusiveLock.  This means that nextval() and
ALTER SEQUENCE block each other, and ALTER SEQUENCE on the same sequence
blocks itself.  (This was already the case previously for the OWNER TO,
RENAME, and SET SCHEMA variants.)  Also, rearrange some code so that the
entire AlterSequence is protected by the lock on the sequence.

As an exception, use reduced locking for ALTER SEQUENCE ... RESTART.
Since that is basically a setval(), it does not require the full locking
of other ALTER SEQUENCE actions.  So check whether we are only running a
RESTART and run with less locking if so.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reported-by: Jason Petersen <jason@citusdata.com>
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
2017-05-15 10:19:57 -04:00
Tom Lane 93ece9cc88 Edit SGML documentation related to extended statistics.
Use the "statistics object" terminology uniformly here too.  Assorted
copy-editing.  Put new catalogs.sgml sections into alphabetical order.
2017-05-14 19:15:52 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera bc085205c8 Change CREATE STATISTICS syntax
Previously, we had the WITH clause in the middle of the command, where
you'd specify both generic options as well as statistic types.  Few
people liked this, so this commit changes it to remove the WITH keyword
from that clause and makes it accept statistic types only.  (We
currently don't have any generic options, but if we invent in the
future, we will gain a new WITH clause, probably at the end of the
command).

Also, the column list is now specified without parens, which makes the
whole command look more similar to a SELECT command.  This change will
let us expand the command to supporting expressions (not just columns
names) as well as multiple tables and their join conditions.

Tom added lots of code comments and fixed some parts of the CREATE
STATISTICS reference page, too; more changes in this area are
forthcoming.  He also fixed a potential problem in the alter_generic
regression test, reducing verbosity on a cascaded drop to avoid
dependency on message ordering, as we do in other tests.

Tom also closed a security bug: we documented that table ownership was
required in order to create a statistics object on it, but didn't
actually implement it.

Implement tab-completion for statistics objects.  This can stand some
more improvement.

Authors: Alvaro Herrera, with lots of cleanup by Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170420212426.ltvgyhnefvhixm6i@alvherre.pgsql
2017-05-12 14:59:35 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut d496a65790 Standardize "WAL location" terminology
Other previously used terms were "WAL position" or "log position".
2017-05-12 13:51:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut c1a7f64b4a Replace "transaction log" with "write-ahead log"
This makes documentation and error messages match the renaming of "xlog"
to "wal" in APIs and file naming.
2017-05-12 11:52:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 96e1cb4c0f pg_dump: Add --no-publications option
Author: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-05-12 09:15:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut b807f59828 Rework the options syntax for logical replication commands
For CREATE/ALTER PUBLICATION/SUBSCRIPTION, use similar option style as
other statements that use a WITH clause for options.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-05-12 08:57:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 26aa1cf376 pg_dump: Add --no-subscriptions option
Author: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-05-09 10:58:06 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 013c1178fd Remove the NODROP SLOT option from DROP SUBSCRIPTION
It turned out this approach had problems, because a DROP command should
not have any options other than CASCADE and RESTRICT.  Instead, always
attempt to drop the slot if there is one configured, but also add an
ALTER SUBSCRIPTION action to set the slot to NONE.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/29431.1493730652@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-05-09 10:20:42 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas eb61136dc7 Remove support for password_encryption='off' / 'plain'.
Storing passwords in plaintext hasn't been a good idea for a very long
time, if ever. Now seems like a good time to finally forbid it, since we're
messing with this in PostgreSQL 10 anyway.

Remove the CREATE/ALTER USER UNENCRYPTED PASSSWORD 'foo' syntax, since
storing passwords unencrypted is no longer supported. ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
'foo' is still accepted, but ENCRYPTED is now just a noise-word, it does
the same as just PASSWORD 'foo'.

Likewise, remove the --unencrypted option from createuser, but accept
--encrypted as a no-op for backward compatibility. AFAICS, --encrypted was
a no-op even before this patch, because createuser encrypted the password
before sending it to the server even if --encrypted was not specified. It
added the ENCRYPTED keyword to the SQL command, but since the password was
already in encrypted form, it didn't make any difference. The documentation
was not clear on whether that was intended or not, but it's moot now.

Also, while password_encryption='on' is still accepted as an alias for
'md5', it is now marked as hidden, so that it is not listed as an accepted
value in error hints, for example. That's not directly related to removing
'plain', but it seems better this way.

Reviewed by Michael Paquier

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/16e9b768-fd78-0b12-cfc1-7b6b7f238fde@iki.fi
2017-05-08 11:26:07 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut e950024066 doc: Improve order in ALTER PUBLICATION/SUBSCRIPTION ref pages
Move the OWNER and RENAME clauses to the end, so the interesting
functionality is listed first.  This is more typical on nearby reference
pages, whereas the previous order was the order in which the clauses
were added.
2017-05-02 15:31:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut a35ac7c4e3 doc: Update ALTER SEQUENCE claims about changes being nontransactional
Clarify that all changes except RESTART are transactional (since
1753b1b027).

Reported-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-05-02 10:34:49 -04:00
Stephen Frost b9a3ef55b2 Remove unnecessairly duplicated gram.y productions
Declarative partitioning duplicated the TypedTableElement productions,
evidently to remove the need to specify WITH OPTIONS when creating
partitions.  Instead, simply make WITH OPTIONS optional in the
TypedTableElement production and remove all of the duplicate
PartitionElement-related productions.  This change simplifies the
syntax and makes WITH OPTIONS optional when adding defaults, constraints
or storage parameters to columns when creating either typed tables or
partitions.

Also update pg_dump to no longer include WITH OPTIONS, since it's not
necessary, and update the documentation to reflect that WITH OPTIONS is
now optional.
2017-04-27 20:14:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut e315346d83 doc: ALTER SUBSCRIPTION documentation fixes
WITH is optional for REFRESH PUBLICATION.  Also, remove a spurious
bracket and fix a punctuation.

Author: Euler Taveira <euler@timbira.com.br>
2017-04-26 12:07:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 1d8573ed55 doc: first draft of Postgres 10 release notes 2017-04-24 21:26:33 -04:00
Tom Lane 8bcb31ad5a Sync pg_ctl documentation and usage message with reality.
Commit 05cd12ed5 ("pg_ctl: Change default to wait for all actions")
was a tad sloppy about updating the documentation to match.  The
documentation was also sorely in need of a copy-editing pass, having
been adjusted at different times by different people who took little
care to maintain consistency of style.
2017-04-20 14:41:55 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 594b526bcf Modify message when partitioned table is added to publication
Give a more specific error message than "xyz is not a table".

Also document in CREATE PUBLICATION which kinds of relations are not
supported.

based on patch by Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
2017-04-20 14:18:33 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas b2188575c5 Fix example on creating a trigger with a transition table.
Yugo Nagata

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20170417180921.3047f3b0.nagata@sraoss.co.jp
2017-04-18 11:51:06 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera 8c5cdb7f4f Tighten up relation kind checks for extended statistics
We were accepting creation of extended statistics only for regular
tables, but they can usefully be created for foreign tables, partitioned
tables, and materialized views, too.  Allow those cases.

While at it, make sure all the rejected cases throw a consistent error
message, and add regression tests for the whole thing.

Author: David Rowley, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f-BmGo410bh5RSPZUvOO0LhmHL2NYmdrC_Jm8pk_FfyCA@mail.gmail.com
2017-04-17 17:55:55 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut 1fe33252a0 Document that ONLY can be specified in publication commands
Author: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
2017-04-17 09:51:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 6e5f9a6dc0 Fix typo in comment 2017-04-14 14:07:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 887227a1cc Add option to modify sync commit per subscription
This also changes default behaviour of subscription workers to
synchronous_commit = off.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-04-14 13:58:46 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut a9254e675b pg_dump: Always dump subscriptions NOCONNECT
This removes the pg_dump option --no-subscription-connect and makes it
the default.  Dumping a subscription so that it activates right away
when restored is not very useful, because the state of the publication
server is unclear.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/e4fbfad5-c6ac-fd50-6777-18c84b34eb2f@2ndquadrant.com
2017-04-13 12:01:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut c31671f9b5 pg_dump: Dump subscriptions by default
Dump subscriptions if the current user is a superuser, otherwise write a
warning and skip them.  Remove the pg_dump option
--include-subscriptions.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/e4fbfad5-c6ac-fd50-6777-18c84b34eb2f@2ndquadrant.com
2017-04-13 12:01:27 -04:00
Fujii Masao a6e7d591d0 Improve documentations for ALTER PUBLICATION and ALTER SUBSCRIPTION.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoC32YgtateNqTFXzTJmHHe6hXs4cpJTND3n-Ts8f-aMqw@mail.gmail.com
2017-04-13 11:29:53 +09:00
Bruce Momjian 1e298b8dbb doc: clearify pg_upgrade default copy behavior
Reported-by: Marek <marek.cvoren@gmail.com>

Discussion: 20170328110253.2695.62609@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-04-11 12:14:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut f0e44021df doc: Add some markup 2017-04-07 22:45:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 3217327053 Identity columns
This is the SQL standard-conforming variant of PostgreSQL's serial
columns.  It fixes a few usability issues that serial columns have:

- CREATE TABLE / LIKE copies default but refers to same sequence
- cannot add/drop serialness with ALTER TABLE
- dropping default does not drop sequence
- need to grant separate privileges to sequence
- other slight weirdnesses because serial is some kind of special macro

Reviewed-by: Vitaly Burovoy <vitaly.burovoy@gmail.com>
2017-04-06 08:41:37 -04:00
Simon Riggs 2686ee1b7c Collect and use multi-column dependency stats
Follow on patch in the multi-variate statistics patch series.

CREATE STATISTICS s1 WITH (dependencies) ON (a, b) FROM t;
ANALYZE;
will collect dependency stats on (a, b) and then use the measured
dependency in subsequent query planning.

Commit 7b504eb282 added
CREATE STATISTICS with n-distinct coefficients. These are now
specified using the mutually exclusive option WITH (ndistinct).

Author: Tomas Vondra, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI, Álvaro Herrera, Dean Rasheed, Robert Haas
and many other comments and contributions
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/56f40b20-c464-fad2-ff39-06b668fac47c@2ndquadrant.com
2017-04-05 18:00:42 -04:00
Kevin Grittner 5ebeb579b9 Follow-on cleanup for the transition table patch.
Commit 59702716 added transition table support to PL/pgsql so that
SQL queries in trigger functions could access those transient
tables.  In order to provide the same level of support for PL/perl,
PL/python and PL/tcl, refactor the relevant code into a new
function SPI_register_trigger_data.  Call the new function in the
trigger handler of all four PLs, and document it as a public SPI
function so that authors of out-of-tree PLs can do the same.

Also get rid of a second QueryEnvironment object that was
maintained by PL/pgsql.  That was previously used to deal with
cursors, but the same approach wasn't appropriate for PLs that are
less tangled up with core code.  Instead, have SPI_cursor_open
install the connection's current QueryEnvironment, as already
happens for SPI_execute_plan.

While in the docs, remove the note that transition tables were only
supported in C and PL/pgSQL triggers, and correct some ommissions.

Thomas Munro with some work by Kevin Grittner (mostly docs)
2017-04-04 18:36:39 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 60a0b2ec89 Adjust min/max values when changing sequence type
When changing the type of a sequence, adjust the min/max values of the
sequence if it looks like the previous values were the default values.
Previously, it would leave the old values in place, requiring manual
adjustments even in the usual/default cases.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vitaly Burovoy <vitaly.burovoy@gmail.com>
2017-04-04 12:49:39 -04:00
Tom Lane ffac5998b4 Doc: clarify behavior of OT_WHOLE_LINE and OT_FILEPIPE psql slash commands.
This is another bit of ancient behavior that was documented poorly (in
a couple of cases) or not at all (in several others).

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b4ea968-753f-4b5f-b46c-d7d3bf7c8f90@manitou-mail.org
2017-04-02 19:01:53 -04:00
Tom Lane 68dba97a4d Document psql's behavior of recalling the previously executed query.
Various psql slash commands that normally act on the current query buffer
will automatically recall and re-use the most recently executed SQL command
instead, if the current query buffer is empty.  Although this behavior is
ancient (dating apparently to commit 77a472993), it was documented nowhere
in the psql reference page.  For that matter, we'd never bothered to define
the concept of "current query buffer" explicitly.  Fix that.  Do some
wordsmithing on relevant command descriptions to improve clarity and
consistency.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b4ea968-753f-4b5f-b46c-d7d3bf7c8f90@manitou-mail.org
2017-04-02 18:26:37 -04:00
Tom Lane f833c847b8 Allow psql variable substitution to occur in backtick command strings.
Previously, text between backquotes in a psql metacommand's arguments
was always passed to the shell literally.  That considerably hobbles
the usefulness of the feature for scripting, so we'd foreseen for a long
time that we'd someday want to allow substitution of psql variables into
the shell command.  IMO the addition of \if metacommands has brought us to
that point, since \if can greatly benefit from some sort of client-side
expression evaluation capability, and psql itself is not going to grow any
such thing in time for v10.  Hence, this patch.  It allows :VARIABLE to be
replaced by the exact contents of the named variable, while :'VARIABLE'
is replaced by the variable's contents suitably quoted to become a single
shell-command argument.  (The quoting rules for that are different from
those for SQL literals, so this is a bit of an abuse of the :'VARIABLE'
notation, but I doubt anyone will be confused.)

As with other situations in psql, no substitution occurs if the word
following a colon is not a known variable name.  That limits the risk of
compatibility problems for existing psql scripts; but the risk isn't zero,
so this needs to be called out in the v10 release notes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9561.1490895211@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-04-01 21:44:54 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera 7526e10224 BRIN auto-summarization
Previously, only VACUUM would cause a page range to get initially
summarized by BRIN indexes, which for some use cases takes too much time
since the inserts occur.  To avoid the delay, have brininsert request a
summarization run for the previous range as soon as the first tuple is
inserted into the first page of the next range.  Autovacuum is in charge
of processing these requests, after doing all the regular vacuuming/
analyzing work on tables.

This doesn't impose any new tasks on autovacuum, because autovacuum was
already in charge of doing summarizations.  The only actual effect is to
change the timing, i.e. that it occurs earlier.  For this reason, we
don't go any great lengths to record these requests very robustly; if
they are lost because of a server crash or restart, they will happen at
a later time anyway.

Most of the new code here is in autovacuum, which can now be told about
"work items" to process.  This can be used for other things such as GIN
pending list cleaning, perhaps visibility map bit setting, both of which
are currently invoked during vacuum, but do not really depend on vacuum
taking place.

The requests are at the page range level, a granularity for which we did
not have SQL-level access; we only had index-level summarization
requests via brin_summarize_new_values().  It seems reasonable to add
SQL-level access to range-level summarization too, so add a function
brin_summarize_range() to do that.

Authors: Álvaro Herrera, based on sketch from Simon Riggs.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170301045823.vneqdqkmsd4as4ds@alvherre.pgsql
2017-04-01 14:00:53 -03:00
Kevin Grittner 5970271632 Add transition table support to plpgsql.
Kevin Grittner and Thomas Munro
Reviewed by Heikki Linnakangas, David Fetter, and Thomas Munro
with valuable comments and suggestions from many others
2017-03-31 23:30:08 -05:00
Tom Lane 64d4da511c For foreign keys, check REFERENCES privilege only on the referenced table.
We were requiring that the user have REFERENCES permission on both the
referenced and referencing tables --- but this doesn't seem to have any
support in the SQL standard, which says only that you need REFERENCES
permission on the referenced table.  And ALTER TABLE ADD FOREIGN KEY has
already checked that you own the referencing table, so the check could
only fail if a table owner has revoked his own REFERENCES permission.
Moreover, the symmetric interpretation of this permission is unintuitive
and confusing, as per complaint from Paul Jungwirth.  So let's drop the
referencing-side check.

In passing, do a bit of wordsmithing on the GRANT reference page so that
all the privilege types are described in similar fashion.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8940.1490906755@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-03-31 18:11:30 -04:00
Robert Haas c94e6942ce Don't allocate storage for partitioned tables.
Also, don't allow setting reloptions on them, since that would have no
effect given the lack of storage.  The patch does this by introducing
a new reloption kind for which there are currently no reloptions -- we
might have some in the future -- so it adjusts parseRelOptions to
handle that case correctly.

Bumped catversion.  System catalogs that contained reloptions for
partitioned tables are no longer valid; plus, there are now fewer
physical files on disk, which is not technically a catalog change but
still a good reason to re-initdb.

Amit Langote, reviewed by Maksim Milyutin and Kyotaro Horiguchi and
revised a bit by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20170331.173326.212311140.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-31 16:28:51 -04:00
Tom Lane e984ef5861 Support \if ... \elif ... \else ... \endif in psql scripting.
This patch adds nestable conditional blocks to psql.  The control
structure feature per se is complete, but the boolean expressions
understood by \if and \elif are pretty primitive; basically, after
variable substitution and backtick expansion, the result has to be
"true" or "false" or one of the other standard spellings of a boolean
value.  But that's enough for many purposes, since you can always
do the heavy lifting on the server side; and we can extend it later.

Along the way, pay down some of the technical debt that had built up
around psql/command.c:
* Refactor exec_command() into a function per command, instead of
being a 1500-line monstrosity.  This makes the file noticeably longer
because of repetitive function header/trailer overhead, but it seems
much more readable.
* Teach psql_get_variable() and psqlscanslash.l to suppress variable
substitution and backtick expansion on the basis of the conditional
stack state, thereby allowing removal of the OT_NO_EVAL kluge.
* Fix the no-doubt-once-expedient hack of sometimes silently substituting
mainloop.c's previous_buf for query_buf when calling HandleSlashCmds.
(It's a bit remarkable that commands like \r worked at all with that.)
Recall of a previous query is now done explicitly in the slash commands
where that should happen.

Corey Huinker, reviewed by Fabien Coelho, further hacking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=c94OSRTnat=LX0ivNq4pxDNeoomFfYvBKM5N_xfmLtAA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-30 12:59:24 -04:00
Fujii Masao ec19693014 Simplify the example of VACUUM in documentation.
Previously a detailed activity report by VACUUM VERBOSE ANALYZE was
described as an example of VACUUM in docs. But it had been obsolete
for a long time. For example, commit feb4f44d29
updated the content of that activity report in 2003, but we had
forgotten to update the example.

So basically we need to update the example. But since no one cared
about the details of VACUUM output and complained about that mistake
for such long time, per discussion on hackers, we decided to get rid
of the detailed activity report from the example and simplify it.

Back-patch to all supported versions.

Reported by Masahiko Sawada, patch by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAGA2pB3p-CWmTkxBsbkZS1bcDGBLcYVcvcDxspG_XAfA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-31 01:31:15 +09:00
Teodor Sigaev ab89e465cb Altering default privileges on schemas
Extend ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES command to schemas.

Author: Matheus Oliveira
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelínek, Ashutosh Sharma

https://commitfest.postgresql.org/13/887/
2017-03-28 18:58:55 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut 5196f13b27 doc: Fix oldhtml/old PDF build again
Commit e259e1f748 was faulty and created
some broken output.  This one fixes it better.
2017-03-27 11:58:52 -04:00
Robert Haas d65561464f Improve documentation of how NOT NULL works with partitioning.
Amit Langote

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/a6f99cdb-21e7-1d65-1381-91f2cfa156e2@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-27 11:01:33 -04:00
Robert Haas 4785e377f9 Tidy up the CREATE TABLE documentation for partitioning.
Remove some <note> tags that make this too "loud".  Fix some typos.

Amit Langote, with a few minor corrections by me

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/a6f99cdb-21e7-1d65-1381-91f2cfa156e2@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-27 11:00:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut e259e1f748 doc: Fix oldhtml/old PDF build
"xref to REFSECT1 unsupported" with the DSSSL stylesheets.

Reported-by: Devrim Gündüz <devrim@gunduz.org>
2017-03-26 15:03:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 87dee41f3e Add COMMENT and SECURITY LABEL support for publications and subscriptions 2017-03-24 23:44:23 -04:00
Fujii Masao 70adf2fbe1 Make VACUUM VERBOSE report the number of skipped frozen pages.
Previously manual VACUUM did not report the number of skipped frozen
pages even when VERBOSE option is specified. But this information is
helpful to monitor the VACUUM activity, and also autovacuum reports that
number in the log file when the condition of log_autovacuum_min_duration
is met.

This commit changes VACUUM VERBOSE so that it reports the number
of frozen pages that it skips.

Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Yugo Nagata and Jim Nasby

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDZQKCxo0L39Mrq08cONNkXQKXuh=2DP1Q8ebmt35SoaA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-25 02:39:44 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera 7b504eb282 Implement multivariate n-distinct coefficients
Add support for explicitly declared statistic objects (CREATE
STATISTICS), allowing collection of statistics on more complex
combinations that individual table columns.  Companion commands DROP
STATISTICS and ALTER STATISTICS ... OWNER TO / SET SCHEMA / RENAME are
added too.  All this DDL has been designed so that more statistic types
can be added later on, such as multivariate most-common-values and
multivariate histograms between columns of a single table, leaving room
for permitting columns on multiple tables, too, as well as expressions.

This commit only adds support for collection of n-distinct coefficient
on user-specified sets of columns in a single table.  This is useful to
estimate number of distinct groups in GROUP BY and DISTINCT clauses;
estimation errors there can cause over-allocation of memory in hashed
aggregates, for instance, so it's a worthwhile problem to solve.  A new
special pseudo-type pg_ndistinct is used.

(num-distinct estimation was deemed sufficiently useful by itself that
this is worthwhile even if no further statistic types are added
immediately; so much so that another version of essentially the same
functionality was submitted by Kyotaro Horiguchi:
https://postgr.es/m/20150828.173334.114731693.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
though this commit does not use that code.)

Author: Tomas Vondra.  Some code rework by Álvaro.
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Jeff Janes,
    Ideriha Takeshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/543AFA15.4080608@fuzzy.cz
    https://postgr.es/m/20170320190220.ixlaueanxegqd5gr@alvherre.pgsql
2017-03-24 14:06:10 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut eccfef81e1 ICU support
Add a column collprovider to pg_collation that determines which library
provides the collation data.  The existing choices are default and libc,
and this adds an icu choice, which uses the ICU4C library.

The pg_locale_t type is changed to a union that contains the
provider-specific locale handles.  Users of locale information are
changed to look into that struct for the appropriate handle to use.

Also add a collversion column that records the version of the collation
when it is created, and check at run time whether it is still the same.
This detects potentially incompatible library upgrades that can corrupt
indexes and other structures.  This is currently only supported by
ICU-provided collations.

initdb initializes the default collation set as before from the `locale
-a` output but also adds all available ICU locales with a "-x-icu"
appended.

Currently, ICU-provided collations can only be explicitly named
collations.  The global database locales are still always libc-provided.

ICU support is enabled by configure --with-icu.

Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson <andreas@proxel.se>
2017-03-23 15:28:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 50c956add8 Remove createlang and droplang
They have been deprecated since PostgreSQL 9.1.

Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2017-03-23 14:16:45 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 7c4f52409a Logical replication support for initial data copy
Add functionality for a new subscription to copy the initial data in the
tables and then sync with the ongoing apply process.

For the copying, add a new internal COPY option to have the COPY source
data provided by a callback function.  The initial data copy works on
the subscriber by receiving COPY data from the publisher and then
providing it locally into a COPY that writes to the destination table.

A WAL receiver can now execute full SQL commands.  This is used here to
obtain information about tables and publications.

Several new options were added to CREATE and ALTER SUBSCRIPTION to
control whether and when initial table syncing happens.

Change pg_dump option --no-create-subscription-slots to
--no-subscription-connect and use the new CREATE SUBSCRIPTION
... NOCONNECT option for that.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Tested-by: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
2017-03-23 08:55:37 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut cbf7ed51b8 doc: Improve CREATE PUBLICATION examples 2017-03-22 15:27:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut a2760915b3 doc: Markup and formatting improvements 2017-03-22 15:27:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 4cfc9484d4 Refine rules for altering publication owner
Previously, the new owner had to be a superuser.  The new rules are more
refined similar to other objects.

Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-03-22 11:19:30 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan 96a7128b7b Sync pg_dump and pg_dumpall output
Before exiting any files are fsync'ed. A --no-sync option is also
provided for a faster exit if desired.

Michael Paquier.

Reviewed by Albe Laurenz

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqS1uZ=Ov+UruW6jr3vB-S_DLVMPc0dQpV-fTDjmm0ZQMg@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-22 10:20:13 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 010505546a doc: Improve markup 2017-03-21 08:33:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian 17fa3e834f doc: clarify that function "ownership" that controls permission
It used to say the creation user.

Reported-by: Nathan Wagner
2017-03-20 22:33:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian c709b113e8 doc: improve createdb example
The previous example could error out due to encoding mismatches;  use
-T/template instead.

Reported-by: Jason O'Donnell
2017-03-20 21:23:56 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan b6fb534f10 Add IF NOT EXISTS for CREATE SERVER and CREATE USER MAPPING
There is still some inconsistency with the error messages surrounding
foreign servers. Some use the word "foreign" and some don't. My
inclination is to remove all such uses of "foreign" on the basis that
the  CREATE/ALTER/DROP SERVER commands don't use the word. However, that
is left for another day. In this patch I have kept to the existing usage
in the affected commands, which omits "foreign".

Anastasia Lubennikova, reviewed by Arthur Zakirov and Ashtosh Bapat.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/7c2ab9b8-388a-1ce0-23a3-7acf2a0ed3c6@postgrespro.ru
2017-03-20 16:40:45 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 5e86bb51ea doc: Update compatibility claim
Update outdated claim that TRUNCATE is a PostgreSQL extension.

Add cross-links between DELETE and TRUNCATE references pages.
2017-03-18 14:25:41 -04:00
Robert Haas 88e66d193f Rename "pg_clog" directory to "pg_xact".
Names containing the letters "log" sometimes confuse users into
believing that only non-critical data is present.  It is hoped
this renaming will discourage ill-considered removals of transaction
status data.

Michael Paquier

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmoa9xFQyjRZupbdEFuwUerFTvC6HjZq1ud6GYragGDFFgA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-17 09:48:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut e76db009f0 Add more documentation and tests for publications
Add/correct documentation and add some tests related to how access
control around adding tables to publications works.
2017-03-15 13:52:07 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut aefeb68741 Allow referring to functions without arguments when unique
In DDL commands referring to an existing function, allow omitting the
argument list if the function name is unique in its schema, per SQL
standard.

This uses the same logic that the regproc type uses for finding
functions by name only.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-03-14 23:55:19 -04:00
Robert Haas c11453ce0a hash: Add write-ahead logging support.
The warning about hash indexes not being write-ahead logged and their
use being discouraged has been removed.  "snapshot too old" is now
supported for tables with hash indexes.  Most importantly, barring
bugs, hash indexes will now be crash-safe and usable on standbys.

This commit doesn't yet add WAL consistency checking for hash
indexes, as we now have for other index types; a separate patch has
been submitted to cure that lack.

Amit Kapila, reviewed and slightly modified by me.  The larger patch
series of which this is a part has been reviewed and tested by Álvaro
Herrera, Ashutosh Sharma, Mark Kirkwood, Jeff Janes, and Jesper
Pedersen.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1JOBX=YU33631Qh-XivYXtPSALh514+jR8XeD7v+K3r_Q@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-14 13:27:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut a47b38c9ee Spelling fixes
From: Josh Soref <jsoref@gmail.com>
2017-03-14 12:58:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut 37289ffdbf doc: Fix synopsis 2017-03-14 11:19:12 -04:00
Robert Haas b54aad8e34 Document lack of validation when attaching foreign partitions.
Ashutosh Bapat, revised a bit by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFjFpRdLaCa-1wJase0=YWG5o3cJnbuUt_vrqm2TDBKM_vQ_oA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-09 13:13:15 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut be37c2120a Enable replication connections by default in pg_hba.conf
initdb now initializes a pg_hba.conf that allows replication connections
from the local host, same as it does for regular connections.  The
connecting user still needs to have the REPLICATION attribute or be a
superuser.

The intent is to allow pg_basebackup from the local host to succeed
without requiring additional configuration.

Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com> and me
2017-03-09 08:39:44 -05:00
Stephen Frost f9b1a0dd40 Expose explain's SUMMARY option
This exposes the existing explain summary option to users to allow them
to choose if they wish to have the planning time and totalled run time
included in the EXPLAIN result.  The existing default behavior is
retained if SUMMARY is not specified- running explain without analyze
will not print the summary lines (just the planning time, currently)
while running explain with analyze will include the summary lines (both
the planning time and the totalled execution time).

Users who wish to see the summary information for plain explain can now
use: EXPLAIN (SUMMARY ON) query;  Users who do not want to have the
summary printed for an analyze run can use:
EXPLAIN (ANALYZE ON, SUMMARY OFF) query;

With this, we can now also have EXPLAIN ANALYZE queries included in our
regression tests by using:
EXPLAIN (ANALYZE ON, TIMING OFF, SUMMARY off) query;

I went ahead and added an example of this, which will hopefully not make
the buildfarm complain.

Author: Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFjFpReE5z2h98U2Vuia8hcEkpRRwrauRjHmyE44hNv8-xk+XA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-08 15:14:03 -05:00
Robert Haas 508dabaf39 Remove duplicated word.
Amit Langote
2017-03-07 11:18:56 -05:00
Stephen Frost b2678efd43 psql: Add \gx command
It can often be useful to use expanded mode output (\x) for just a
single query.  Introduce a \gx which acts exactly like \g except that it
will force expanded output mode for that one \gx call.  This is simpler
than having to use \x as a toggle and also means that the user doesn't
have to worry about the current state of the expanded variable, or
resetting it later, to ensure a given query is always returned in
expanded mode.

Primairly Christoph's patch, though I did tweak the documentation and help
text a bit, and re-indented the tab completion section.

Author: Christoph Berg
Reviewed By: Daniel Verite
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170127132737.6skslelaf4txs6iw%40msg.credativ.de
2017-03-07 09:31:52 -05:00
Simon Riggs 9a83d56b38 Allow pg_dumpall to dump roles w/o user passwords
Add new option --no-role-passwords which dumps roles without passwords.
Since we don’t need passwords, we choose to use pg_roles in preference
to pg_authid since access may be restricted for security reasons in
some configrations.

Robins Tharakan and Simon Riggs
2017-03-07 22:00:54 +08:00
Heikki Linnakangas 818fd4a67d Support SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication (RFC 5802 and 7677).
This introduces a new generic SASL authentication method, similar to the
GSS and SSPI methods. The server first tells the client which SASL
authentication mechanism to use, and then the mechanism-specific SASL
messages are exchanged in AuthenticationSASLcontinue and PasswordMessage
messages. Only SCRAM-SHA-256 is supported at the moment, but this allows
adding more SASL mechanisms in the future, without changing the overall
protocol.

Support for channel binding, aka SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS is left for later.

The SASLPrep algorithm, for pre-processing the password, is not yet
implemented. That could cause trouble, if you use a password with
non-ASCII characters, and a client library that does implement SASLprep.
That will hopefully be added later.

Authorization identities, as specified in the SCRAM-SHA-256 specification,
are ignored. SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION provides more or less the same
functionality, anyway.

If a user doesn't exist, perform a "mock" authentication, by constructing
an authentic-looking challenge on the fly. The challenge is derived from
a new system-wide random value, "mock authentication nonce", which is
created at initdb, and stored in the control file. We go through these
motions, in order to not give away the information on whether the user
exists, to unauthenticated users.

Bumps PG_CONTROL_VERSION, because of the new field in control file.

Patch by Michael Paquier and Heikki Linnakangas, reviewed at different
stages by Robert Haas, Stephen Frost, David Steele, Aleksander Alekseev,
and many others.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqRbR3GmFYdedCAhzukfKrgBLTLtMvENOmPrVWREsZkF8g%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqSMXU35g%3DW9X74HVeQp0uvgJxvYOuA4A-A3M%2B0wfEBv-w%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55192AFE.6080106@iki.fi
2017-03-07 14:25:40 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut e6477a8134 Combine several DROP variants into generic DropStmt
Combine DROP of FOREIGN DATA WRAPPER, SERVER, POLICY, RULE, and TRIGGER
into generic DropStmt grammar.

Reviewed-by: Jim Nasby <Jim.Nasby@BlueTreble.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-03-06 13:31:47 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 583f6c4148 Allow dropping multiple functions at once
The generic drop support already supported dropping multiple objects of
the same kind at once.  But the previous representation
of function signatures across two grammar symbols and structure members
made this cumbersome to do for functions, so it was not supported.  Now
that function signatures are represented by a single structure, it's
trivial to add this support.  Same for aggregates and operators.

Reviewed-by: Jim Nasby <Jim.Nasby@BlueTreble.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-03-06 13:31:47 -05:00
Simon Riggs 6f3a13ff05 Enhance docs for ALTER TABLE lock levels of storage parms
As requested by Robert Haas
2017-03-06 16:48:12 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut 272adf4f9c Disallow CREATE/DROP SUBSCRIPTION in transaction block
Disallow CREATE SUBSCRIPTION and DROP SUBSCRIPTION in a transaction
block when the replication slot is to be created or dropped, since that
cannot be rolled back.

based on patch by Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
2017-03-03 23:29:13 -05:00
Robert Haas 3c3bb99330 Don't uselessly rewrite, truncate, VACUUM, or ANALYZE partitioned tables.
Also, recursively perform VACUUM and ANALYZE on partitions when the
command is applied to a partitioned table.  In passing, some related
documentation updates.

Amit Langote, reviewed by Michael Paquier, Ashutosh Bapat, and by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/47288cf1-f72c-dfc2-5ff0-4af962ae5c1b@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-02 17:23:44 +05:30
Magnus Hagander 51e26c9c3d Clarify the role of checkpoint at the begininng of base backups
Output a message about checkpoint starting in verbose mode of
pg_basebackup, and make the documentation state more clearly that this
happens.

Author: Michael Banck
2017-02-26 21:31:54 +01:00
Bruce Momjian 5639ceddcb pg_upgrade docs: clarify instructions on standby extensions
Previously the pg_upgrade standby upgrade instructions said not to
execute pgcrypto.sql, but it should have referenced the extension
command "CREATE EXTENSION pgcrypto".  This patch makes that doc change.

Reported-by: a private bug report

Backpatch-through: 9.4, where standby instructions were added
2017-02-25 12:59:23 -05:00
Robert Haas a3dc8e495b Make partitions automatically inherit OIDs.
Previously, if the parent was specified as WITH OIDS, each child
also had to be explicitly specified as WITH OIDS.

Amit Langote, per a report from Simon Riggs.  Some additional
work on the documentation changes by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jJBpWocfKrbJcaf3iBt9E3U=WPE_NC8YE6rye+YJ1sYnQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-02-19 21:29:27 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut 68f3dbc552 doc: Fix typos
From: Thom Brown <thom@linux.com>
2017-02-17 18:59:29 -05:00
Tom Lane 2b18743614 Doc: fix syntax synopsis for INSERT ... ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE.
Commit 906bfcad7 adjusted the syntax synopsis for UPDATE, but missed
the fact that the INSERT synopsis now contains a duplicate of that.

In passing, improve wording and markup about using a table alias to
dodge the conflict with use of "excluded" as a special table name.
2017-02-15 15:41:09 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 6d16ecc646 Add CREATE COLLATION IF NOT EXISTS clause
The core of the functionality was already implemented when
pg_import_system_collations was added.  This just exposes it as an
option in the SQL command.
2017-02-15 10:01:28 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 2ea5b06c7a Add CREATE SEQUENCE AS <data type> clause
This stores a data type, required to be an integer type, with the
sequence.  The sequences min and max values default to the range
supported by the type, and they cannot be set to values exceeding that
range.  The internal implementation of the sequence is not affected.

Change the serial types to create sequences of the appropriate type.
This makes sure that the min and max values of the sequence for a serial
column match the range of values supported by the table column.  So the
sequence can no longer overflow the table column.

This also makes monitoring for sequence exhaustion/wraparound easier,
which currently requires various contortions to cross-reference the
sequences with the table columns they are used with.

This commit also effectively reverts the pg_sequence column reordering
in f3b421da5f, because the new seqtypid
column allows us to fill the hole in the struct and create a more
natural overall column ordering.

Reviewed-by: Steve Singer <steve@ssinger.info>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-02-10 15:34:35 -05:00
Simon Riggs c1369fe2ea Improve CREATE TABLE documentation of partitioning
Amit Langote, with corrections by me
2017-02-10 08:59:37 +00:00
Robert Haas 62e8b38751 Rename command line options for ongoing xlog -> wal conversion.
initdb and pg_basebackup now have a --waldir option rather --xlogdir,
and pg_basebackup now has --wal-method rather than --xlog-method.
2017-02-09 16:42:51 -05:00
Robert Haas 85c11324ca Rename user-facing tools with "xlog" in the name to say "wal".
This means pg_receivexlog because pg_receivewal, pg_resetxlog
becomes pg_resetwal, and pg_xlogdump becomes pg_waldump.
2017-02-09 16:23:46 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut e35bbea7dd doc: Some improvements in CREATE SUBSCRIPTION ref page
Add link to description of libpq connection strings.  Add link to
explanation of replication access control.  This currently points to the
description of streaming replication access control, which is currently
the same as for logical replication, but that might be refined later.
Also remove plain-text passwords from the examples, to not encourage
that dubious practice.

based on suggestions from Simon Riggs
2017-02-07 21:26:50 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut 549f74733f doc: Update CREATE DATABASE examples
The example of using CREATE DATABASE with the ENCODING option did not
work anymore (except in special circumstances) and did not represent a
good general-purpose example, so write some new examples.

Reported-by: marc+pgsql@milestonerdl.com
2017-02-06 11:55:39 -05:00
Tom Lane fd6cd69803 Clean up psql's behavior for a few more control variables.
Modify FETCH_COUNT to always have a defined value, like other control
variables, mainly so it will always appear in "\set" output.

Add hooks to force HISTSIZE to be defined and require it to have an
integer value.  (I don't see any point in allowing it to be set to
non-integral values.)

Add hooks to force IGNOREEOF to be defined and require it to have an
integer value.  Unlike the other cases, here we're trying to be
bug-compatible with a rather bogus externally-defined behavior, so I think
we need to continue to allow "\set IGNOREEOF whatever".  Fix it so that
the substitution hook silently replace non-numeric values with "10",
so that the stored value always reflects what we're really doing.

Add a dummy assign hook for HISTFILE, just so it's always in
variables.c's list.  We can't require it to be defined always, because
that would break the interaction with the PSQL_HISTORY environment
variable, so there isn't any change in visible behavior here.

Remove tab-complete.c's private list of known variable names, since that's
really a maintenance nuisance.  Given the preceding changes, there are no
control variables it won't show anyway.  This does mean that if for some
reason you've unset one of the status variables (DBNAME, HOST, etc), that
variable would not appear in tab completion for \set.  But I think that's
fine, for at least two reasons: we shouldn't be encouraging people to use
those variables as regular variables, and if someone does do so anyway,
why shouldn't it act just like a regular variable?

Remove ugly and no-longer-used-anywhere GetVariableNum().  In general,
future additions of integer-valued control variables should follow the
paradigm of adding an assign hook using ParseVariableNum(), so there's
no reason to expect we'd need this again later.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17516.1485973973@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-02-02 20:16:17 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan f1169ab501 Don't count background workers against a user's connection limit.
Doing so doesn't seem to be within the purpose of the per user
connection limits, and has particularly unfortunate effects in
conjunction with parallel queries.

Backpatch to 9.6 where parallel queries were introduced.

David Rowley, reviewed by Robert Haas and Albe Laurenz.
2017-02-01 18:02:43 -05:00